blob: 493d16882267185b842692f50acdf660086441d5 [file] [log] [blame]
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00001//===- SimplifyCFG.cpp - Code to perform CFG simplification ---------------===//
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00002//
John Criswell482202a2003-10-20 19:43:21 +00003// The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
4//
Chris Lattnerf3ebc3f2007-12-29 20:36:04 +00005// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
6// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00007//
John Criswell482202a2003-10-20 19:43:21 +00008//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00009//
Chris Lattnera704ac82002-10-08 21:36:33 +000010// Peephole optimize the CFG.
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +000011//
12//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
13
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000014#include "llvm/ADT/APInt.h"
15#include "llvm/ADT/ArrayRef.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000016#include "llvm/ADT/DenseMap.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000017#include "llvm/ADT/Optional.h"
Chandler Carruth6bda14b2017-06-06 11:49:48 +000018#include "llvm/ADT/STLExtras.h"
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +000019#include "llvm/ADT/SetOperations.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000020#include "llvm/ADT/SetVector.h"
21#include "llvm/ADT/SmallPtrSet.h"
22#include "llvm/ADT/SmallVector.h"
23#include "llvm/ADT/Statistic.h"
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +000024#include "llvm/ADT/StringRef.h"
Peter Collingbourne0609acc2017-02-15 03:01:11 +000025#include "llvm/Analysis/AssumptionCache.h"
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +000026#include "llvm/Analysis/ConstantFolding.h"
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +000027#include "llvm/Analysis/EHPersonalities.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000028#include "llvm/Analysis/InstructionSimplify.h"
Chandler Carruthd3e73552013-01-07 03:08:10 +000029#include "llvm/Analysis/TargetTransformInfo.h"
David Blaikie31b98d22018-06-04 21:23:21 +000030#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/Local.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000031#include "llvm/Analysis/ValueTracking.h"
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +000032#include "llvm/IR/Attributes.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000033#include "llvm/IR/BasicBlock.h"
Chandler Carruth1305dc32014-03-04 11:45:46 +000034#include "llvm/IR/CFG.h"
Chandler Carruth6bda14b2017-06-06 11:49:48 +000035#include "llvm/IR/CallSite.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000036#include "llvm/IR/Constant.h"
Chandler Carruth8cd041e2014-03-04 12:24:34 +000037#include "llvm/IR/ConstantRange.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000038#include "llvm/IR/Constants.h"
39#include "llvm/IR/DataLayout.h"
40#include "llvm/IR/DerivedTypes.h"
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +000041#include "llvm/IR/Function.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000042#include "llvm/IR/GlobalValue.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000043#include "llvm/IR/GlobalVariable.h"
44#include "llvm/IR/IRBuilder.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000045#include "llvm/IR/InstrTypes.h"
46#include "llvm/IR/Instruction.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000047#include "llvm/IR/Instructions.h"
48#include "llvm/IR/IntrinsicInst.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000049#include "llvm/IR/Intrinsics.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000050#include "llvm/IR/LLVMContext.h"
51#include "llvm/IR/MDBuilder.h"
52#include "llvm/IR/Metadata.h"
53#include "llvm/IR/Module.h"
Chandler Carruth64396b02014-03-04 12:05:47 +000054#include "llvm/IR/NoFolder.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000055#include "llvm/IR/Operator.h"
Chandler Carruth820a9082014-03-04 11:08:18 +000056#include "llvm/IR/PatternMatch.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000057#include "llvm/IR/Type.h"
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +000058#include "llvm/IR/Use.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000059#include "llvm/IR/User.h"
60#include "llvm/IR/Value.h"
61#include "llvm/Support/Casting.h"
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +000062#include "llvm/Support/CommandLine.h"
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +000063#include "llvm/Support/Debug.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000064#include "llvm/Support/ErrorHandling.h"
Craig Topperb45eabc2017-04-26 16:39:58 +000065#include "llvm/Support/KnownBits.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000066#include "llvm/Support/MathExtras.h"
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +000067#include "llvm/Support/raw_ostream.h"
Chandler Carruthaafe0912012-06-29 12:38:19 +000068#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/BasicBlockUtils.h"
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +000069#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/ValueMapper.h"
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +000070#include <algorithm>
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000071#include <cassert>
72#include <climits>
73#include <cstddef>
74#include <cstdint>
75#include <iterator>
Chris Lattner5edb2f32004-10-18 04:07:22 +000076#include <map>
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000077#include <set>
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +000078#include <tuple>
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000079#include <utility>
80#include <vector>
81
Chris Lattnerdf3c3422004-01-09 06:12:26 +000082using namespace llvm;
Benjamin Kramer37172222013-07-04 14:22:02 +000083using namespace PatternMatch;
Brian Gaeke960707c2003-11-11 22:41:34 +000084
Chandler Carruth964daaa2014-04-22 02:55:47 +000085#define DEBUG_TYPE "simplifycfg"
86
James Molloy1b6207e2015-02-13 10:48:30 +000087// Chosen as 2 so as to be cheap, but still to have enough power to fold
88// a select, so the "clamp" idiom (of a min followed by a max) will be caught.
89// To catch this, we need to fold a compare and a select, hence '2' being the
90// minimum reasonable default.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +000091static cl::opt<unsigned> PHINodeFoldingThreshold(
92 "phi-node-folding-threshold", cl::Hidden, cl::init(2),
93 cl::desc(
94 "Control the amount of phi node folding to perform (default = 2)"));
95
96static cl::opt<bool> DupRet(
97 "simplifycfg-dup-ret", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
98 cl::desc("Duplicate return instructions into unconditional branches"));
Peter Collingbourne616044a2011-04-29 18:47:38 +000099
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +0000100static cl::opt<bool>
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000101 SinkCommon("simplifycfg-sink-common", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
102 cl::desc("Sink common instructions down to the end block"));
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +0000103
Alp Tokercb402912014-01-24 17:20:08 +0000104static cl::opt<bool> HoistCondStores(
105 "simplifycfg-hoist-cond-stores", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
106 cl::desc("Hoist conditional stores if an unconditional store precedes"));
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +0000107
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +0000108static cl::opt<bool> MergeCondStores(
109 "simplifycfg-merge-cond-stores", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
110 cl::desc("Hoist conditional stores even if an unconditional store does not "
111 "precede - hoist multiple conditional stores into a single "
112 "predicated store"));
113
114static cl::opt<bool> MergeCondStoresAggressively(
115 "simplifycfg-merge-cond-stores-aggressively", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
116 cl::desc("When merging conditional stores, do so even if the resultant "
117 "basic blocks are unlikely to be if-converted as a result"));
118
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000119static cl::opt<bool> SpeculateOneExpensiveInst(
120 "speculate-one-expensive-inst", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
121 cl::desc("Allow exactly one expensive instruction to be speculatively "
122 "executed"));
123
Sanjay Patel5264cc72016-01-27 19:22:45 +0000124static cl::opt<unsigned> MaxSpeculationDepth(
125 "max-speculation-depth", cl::Hidden, cl::init(10),
126 cl::desc("Limit maximum recursion depth when calculating costs of "
127 "speculatively executed instructions"));
128
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +0000129STATISTIC(NumBitMaps, "Number of switch instructions turned into bitmaps");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000130STATISTIC(NumLinearMaps,
131 "Number of switch instructions turned into linear mapping");
132STATISTIC(NumLookupTables,
133 "Number of switch instructions turned into lookup tables");
134STATISTIC(
135 NumLookupTablesHoles,
136 "Number of switch instructions turned into lookup tables (holes checked)");
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +0000137STATISTIC(NumTableCmpReuses, "Number of reused switch table lookup compares");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000138STATISTIC(NumSinkCommons,
139 "Number of common instructions sunk down to the end block");
Hans Wennborgcd3a11f2012-09-26 14:01:53 +0000140STATISTIC(NumSpeculations, "Number of speculative executed instructions");
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +0000141
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000142namespace {
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000143
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000144// The first field contains the value that the switch produces when a certain
145// case group is selected, and the second field is a vector containing the
146// cases composing the case group.
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +0000147using SwitchCaseResultVectorTy =
148 SmallVector<std::pair<Constant *, SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 4>>, 2>;
149
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000150// The first field contains the phi node that generates a result of the switch
151// and the second field contains the value generated for a certain case in the
152// switch for that PHI.
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +0000153using SwitchCaseResultsTy = SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 4>;
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +0000154
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000155/// ValueEqualityComparisonCase - Represents a case of a switch.
156struct ValueEqualityComparisonCase {
157 ConstantInt *Value;
158 BasicBlock *Dest;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000159
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000160 ValueEqualityComparisonCase(ConstantInt *Value, BasicBlock *Dest)
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000161 : Value(Value), Dest(Dest) {}
162
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000163 bool operator<(ValueEqualityComparisonCase RHS) const {
164 // Comparing pointers is ok as we only rely on the order for uniquing.
165 return Value < RHS.Value;
166 }
Benjamin Kramerc5b06782012-10-14 11:15:42 +0000167
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000168 bool operator==(BasicBlock *RHSDest) const { return Dest == RHSDest; }
169};
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000170
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000171class SimplifyCFGOpt {
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +0000172 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000173 const DataLayout &DL;
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +0000174 SmallPtrSetImpl<BasicBlock *> *LoopHeaders;
Sanjay Patel0f9b4772017-09-27 14:54:16 +0000175 const SimplifyCFGOptions &Options;
176
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000177 Value *isValueEqualityComparison(TerminatorInst *TI);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000178 BasicBlock *GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(
179 TerminatorInst *TI, std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000180 bool SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(TerminatorInst *TI,
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000181 BasicBlock *Pred,
182 IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +0000183 bool FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(TerminatorInst *TI,
184 IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000185
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +0000186 bool SimplifyReturn(ReturnInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Bill Wendlingd5d95b02012-02-06 21:16:41 +0000187 bool SimplifyResume(ResumeInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +0000188 bool SimplifySingleResume(ResumeInst *RI);
189 bool SimplifyCommonResume(ResumeInst *RI);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +0000190 bool SimplifyCleanupReturn(CleanupReturnInst *RI);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000191 bool SimplifyUnreachable(UnreachableInst *UI);
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000192 bool SimplifySwitch(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000193 bool SimplifyIndirectBr(IndirectBrInst *IBI);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000194 bool SimplifyUncondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
195 bool SimplifyCondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000196
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000197public:
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000198 SimplifyCFGOpt(const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, const DataLayout &DL,
Joerg Sonnenbergerfa736742017-03-26 06:44:08 +0000199 SmallPtrSetImpl<BasicBlock *> *LoopHeaders,
Sanjay Patel0f9b4772017-09-27 14:54:16 +0000200 const SimplifyCFGOptions &Opts)
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +0000201 : TTI(TTI), DL(DL), LoopHeaders(LoopHeaders), Options(Opts) {}
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000202
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000203 bool run(BasicBlock *BB);
204};
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000205
206} // end anonymous namespace
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000207
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000208/// Return true if it is safe to merge these two
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000209/// terminator instructions together.
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +0000210static bool
211SafeToMergeTerminators(TerminatorInst *SI1, TerminatorInst *SI2,
James Molloy21744682016-09-01 09:01:34 +0000212 SmallSetVector<BasicBlock *, 4> *FailBlocks = nullptr) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000213 if (SI1 == SI2)
214 return false; // Can't merge with self!
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000215
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000216 // It is not safe to merge these two switch instructions if they have a common
217 // successor, and if that successor has a PHI node, and if *that* PHI node has
218 // conflicting incoming values from the two switch blocks.
219 BasicBlock *SI1BB = SI1->getParent();
220 BasicBlock *SI2BB = SI2->getParent();
James Molloy3c1137c2016-08-31 13:32:28 +0000221
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +0000222 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock *, 16> SI1Succs(succ_begin(SI1BB), succ_end(SI1BB));
223 bool Fail = false;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +0000224 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(SI2BB))
225 if (SI1Succs.count(Succ))
226 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000227 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
228 if (PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI1BB) !=
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +0000229 PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI2BB)) {
230 if (FailBlocks)
231 FailBlocks->insert(Succ);
232 Fail = true;
233 }
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000234 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000235
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +0000236 return !Fail;
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000237}
238
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000239/// Return true if it is safe and profitable to merge these two terminator
240/// instructions together, where SI1 is an unconditional branch. PhiNodes will
241/// store all PHI nodes in common successors.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000242static bool
243isProfitableToFoldUnconditional(BranchInst *SI1, BranchInst *SI2,
244 Instruction *Cond,
245 SmallVectorImpl<PHINode *> &PhiNodes) {
246 if (SI1 == SI2)
247 return false; // Can't merge with self!
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000248 assert(SI1->isUnconditional() && SI2->isConditional());
249
250 // We fold the unconditional branch if we can easily update all PHI nodes in
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000251 // common successors:
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000252 // 1> We have a constant incoming value for the conditional branch;
253 // 2> We have "Cond" as the incoming value for the unconditional branch;
254 // 3> SI2->getCondition() and Cond have same operands.
255 CmpInst *Ci2 = dyn_cast<CmpInst>(SI2->getCondition());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000256 if (!Ci2)
257 return false;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000258 if (!(Cond->getOperand(0) == Ci2->getOperand(0) &&
259 Cond->getOperand(1) == Ci2->getOperand(1)) &&
260 !(Cond->getOperand(0) == Ci2->getOperand(1) &&
261 Cond->getOperand(1) == Ci2->getOperand(0)))
262 return false;
263
264 BasicBlock *SI1BB = SI1->getParent();
265 BasicBlock *SI2BB = SI2->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000266 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock *, 16> SI1Succs(succ_begin(SI1BB), succ_end(SI1BB));
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +0000267 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(SI2BB))
268 if (SI1Succs.count(Succ))
269 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000270 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
271 if (PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI1BB) != Cond ||
Nick Lewycky0a045bb2012-06-24 10:15:42 +0000272 !isa<ConstantInt>(PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI2BB)))
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000273 return false;
274 PhiNodes.push_back(PN);
275 }
276 return true;
277}
278
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000279/// Update PHI nodes in Succ to indicate that there will now be entries in it
280/// from the 'NewPred' block. The values that will be flowing into the PHI nodes
281/// will be the same as those coming in from ExistPred, an existing predecessor
282/// of Succ.
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000283static void AddPredecessorToBlock(BasicBlock *Succ, BasicBlock *NewPred,
284 BasicBlock *ExistPred) {
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +0000285 for (PHINode &PN : Succ->phis())
286 PN.addIncoming(PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(ExistPred), NewPred);
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000287}
288
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000289/// Compute an abstract "cost" of speculating the given instruction,
290/// which is assumed to be safe to speculate. TCC_Free means cheap,
291/// TCC_Basic means less cheap, and TCC_Expensive means prohibitively
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +0000292/// expensive.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000293static unsigned ComputeSpeculationCost(const User *I,
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +0000294 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000295 assert(isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I) &&
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000296 "Instruction is not safe to speculatively execute!");
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +0000297 return TTI.getUserCost(I);
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000298}
Sanjay Patelf9b77632015-09-15 15:24:42 +0000299
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000300/// If we have a merge point of an "if condition" as accepted above,
301/// return true if the specified value dominates the block. We
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000302/// don't handle the true generality of domination here, just a special case
303/// which works well enough for us.
304///
305/// If AggressiveInsts is non-null, and if V does not dominate BB, we check to
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000306/// see if V (which must be an instruction) and its recursive operands
307/// that do not dominate BB have a combined cost lower than CostRemaining and
308/// are non-trapping. If both are true, the instruction is inserted into the
309/// set and true is returned.
310///
311/// The cost for most non-trapping instructions is defined as 1 except for
312/// Select whose cost is 2.
313///
314/// After this function returns, CostRemaining is decreased by the cost of
315/// V plus its non-dominating operands. If that cost is greater than
316/// CostRemaining, false is returned and CostRemaining is undefined.
Chris Lattner45c35b12004-10-14 05:13:36 +0000317static bool DominatesMergePoint(Value *V, BasicBlock *BB,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000318 SmallPtrSetImpl<Instruction *> *AggressiveInsts,
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +0000319 unsigned &CostRemaining,
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000320 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
321 unsigned Depth = 0) {
Sanjay Patel5264cc72016-01-27 19:22:45 +0000322 // It is possible to hit a zero-cost cycle (phi/gep instructions for example),
323 // so limit the recursion depth.
324 // TODO: While this recursion limit does prevent pathological behavior, it
325 // would be better to track visited instructions to avoid cycles.
326 if (Depth == MaxSpeculationDepth)
327 return false;
328
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000329 Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V);
Chris Lattnerb8b11592006-10-20 00:42:07 +0000330 if (!I) {
331 // Non-instructions all dominate instructions, but not all constantexprs
332 // can be executed unconditionally.
333 if (ConstantExpr *C = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(V))
334 if (C->canTrap())
335 return false;
336 return true;
337 }
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000338 BasicBlock *PBB = I->getParent();
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000339
Chris Lattner0ce80cd2005-02-27 06:18:25 +0000340 // We don't want to allow weird loops that might have the "if condition" in
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000341 // the bottom of this block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000342 if (PBB == BB)
343 return false;
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000344
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000345 // If this instruction is defined in a block that contains an unconditional
346 // branch to BB, then it must be in the 'conditional' part of the "if
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000347 // statement". If not, it definitely dominates the region.
348 BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PBB->getTerminator());
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000349 if (!BI || BI->isConditional() || BI->getSuccessor(0) != BB)
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000350 return true;
Eli Friedmanb8f6a4f2009-07-17 04:28:42 +0000351
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000352 // If we aren't allowing aggressive promotion anymore, then don't consider
353 // instructions in the 'if region'.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000354 if (!AggressiveInsts)
355 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000356
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000357 // If we have seen this instruction before, don't count it again.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000358 if (AggressiveInsts->count(I))
359 return true;
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000360
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000361 // Okay, it looks like the instruction IS in the "condition". Check to
362 // see if it's a cheap instruction to unconditionally compute, and if it
363 // only uses stuff defined outside of the condition. If so, hoist it out.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000364 if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I))
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000365 return false;
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000366
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000367 unsigned Cost = ComputeSpeculationCost(I, TTI);
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000368
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000369 // Allow exactly one instruction to be speculated regardless of its cost
370 // (as long as it is safe to do so).
371 // This is intended to flatten the CFG even if the instruction is a division
372 // or other expensive operation. The speculation of an expensive instruction
373 // is expected to be undone in CodeGenPrepare if the speculation has not
374 // enabled further IR optimizations.
375 if (Cost > CostRemaining &&
376 (!SpeculateOneExpensiveInst || !AggressiveInsts->empty() || Depth > 0))
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000377 return false;
378
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000379 // Avoid unsigned wrap.
380 CostRemaining = (Cost > CostRemaining) ? 0 : CostRemaining - Cost;
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000381
382 // Okay, we can only really hoist these out if their operands do
383 // not take us over the cost threshold.
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000384 for (User::op_iterator i = I->op_begin(), e = I->op_end(); i != e; ++i)
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000385 if (!DominatesMergePoint(*i, BB, AggressiveInsts, CostRemaining, TTI,
386 Depth + 1))
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000387 return false;
388 // Okay, it's safe to do this! Remember this instruction.
389 AggressiveInsts->insert(I);
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000390 return true;
391}
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +0000392
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000393/// Extract ConstantInt from value, looking through IntToPtr
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000394/// and PointerNullValue. Return NULL if value is not a constant int.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000395static ConstantInt *GetConstantInt(Value *V, const DataLayout &DL) {
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000396 // Normal constant int.
397 ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(V);
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000398 if (CI || !isa<Constant>(V) || !V->getType()->isPointerTy())
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000399 return CI;
400
401 // This is some kind of pointer constant. Turn it into a pointer-sized
402 // ConstantInt if possible.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000403 IntegerType *PtrTy = cast<IntegerType>(DL.getIntPtrType(V->getType()));
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000404
405 // Null pointer means 0, see SelectionDAGBuilder::getValue(const Value*).
406 if (isa<ConstantPointerNull>(V))
407 return ConstantInt::get(PtrTy, 0);
408
409 // IntToPtr const int.
410 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(V))
411 if (CE->getOpcode() == Instruction::IntToPtr)
412 if (ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(CE->getOperand(0))) {
413 // The constant is very likely to have the right type already.
414 if (CI->getType() == PtrTy)
415 return CI;
416 else
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000417 return cast<ConstantInt>(
418 ConstantExpr::getIntegerCast(CI, PtrTy, /*isSigned=*/false));
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000419 }
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000420 return nullptr;
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000421}
422
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000423namespace {
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000424
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000425/// Given a chain of or (||) or and (&&) comparison of a value against a
426/// constant, this will try to recover the information required for a switch
427/// structure.
428/// It will depth-first traverse the chain of comparison, seeking for patterns
429/// like %a == 12 or %a < 4 and combine them to produce a set of integer
430/// representing the different cases for the switch.
431/// Note that if the chain is composed of '||' it will build the set of elements
432/// that matches the comparisons (i.e. any of this value validate the chain)
433/// while for a chain of '&&' it will build the set elements that make the test
434/// fail.
435struct ConstantComparesGatherer {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000436 const DataLayout &DL;
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +0000437
438 /// Value found for the switch comparison
439 Value *CompValue = nullptr;
440
441 /// Extra clause to be checked before the switch
442 Value *Extra = nullptr;
443
444 /// Set of integers to match in switch
445 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 8> Vals;
446
447 /// Number of comparisons matched in the and/or chain
448 unsigned UsedICmps = 0;
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000449
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000450 /// Construct and compute the result for the comparison instruction Cond
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +0000451 ConstantComparesGatherer(Instruction *Cond, const DataLayout &DL) : DL(DL) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000452 gather(Cond);
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000453 }
454
Aaron Ballmanf9a18972015-02-15 22:54:22 +0000455 ConstantComparesGatherer(const ConstantComparesGatherer &) = delete;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000456 ConstantComparesGatherer &
Aaron Ballmanf9a18972015-02-15 22:54:22 +0000457 operator=(const ConstantComparesGatherer &) = delete;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000458
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000459private:
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000460 /// Try to set the current value used for the comparison, it succeeds only if
461 /// it wasn't set before or if the new value is the same as the old one
462 bool setValueOnce(Value *NewVal) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000463 if (CompValue && CompValue != NewVal)
464 return false;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000465 CompValue = NewVal;
466 return (CompValue != nullptr);
467 }
468
469 /// Try to match Instruction "I" as a comparison against a constant and
470 /// populates the array Vals with the set of values that match (or do not
471 /// match depending on isEQ).
472 /// Return false on failure. On success, the Value the comparison matched
473 /// against is placed in CompValue.
474 /// If CompValue is already set, the function is expected to fail if a match
475 /// is found but the value compared to is different.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000476 bool matchInstruction(Instruction *I, bool isEQ) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000477 // If this is an icmp against a constant, handle this as one of the cases.
478 ICmpInst *ICI;
479 ConstantInt *C;
480 if (!((ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I)) &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000481 (C = GetConstantInt(I->getOperand(1), DL)))) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000482 return false;
483 }
484
485 Value *RHSVal;
Chuang-Yu Cheng5078f942016-06-17 00:04:39 +0000486 const APInt *RHSC;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000487
488 // Pattern match a special case
David Majnemerc761afd2016-01-27 02:43:28 +0000489 // (x & ~2^z) == y --> x == y || x == y|2^z
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000490 // This undoes a transformation done by instcombine to fuse 2 compares.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000491 if (ICI->getPredicate() == (isEQ ? ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ : ICmpInst::ICMP_NE)) {
Chuang-Yu Chengdbe00d52016-06-16 04:44:25 +0000492 // It's a little bit hard to see why the following transformations are
493 // correct. Here is a CVC3 program to verify them for 64-bit values:
494
495 /*
496 ONE : BITVECTOR(64) = BVZEROEXTEND(0bin1, 63);
497 x : BITVECTOR(64);
498 y : BITVECTOR(64);
499 z : BITVECTOR(64);
500 mask : BITVECTOR(64) = BVSHL(ONE, z);
501 QUERY( (y & ~mask = y) =>
502 ((x & ~mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y | mask)))
503 );
Chuang-Yu Cheng68f7f1c2016-06-24 01:59:00 +0000504 QUERY( (y | mask = y) =>
505 ((x | mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y & ~mask)))
506 );
Chuang-Yu Chengdbe00d52016-06-16 04:44:25 +0000507 */
508
509 // Please note that each pattern must be a dual implication (<--> or
510 // iff). One directional implication can create spurious matches. If the
511 // implication is only one-way, an unsatisfiable condition on the left
512 // side can imply a satisfiable condition on the right side. Dual
513 // implication ensures that satisfiable conditions are transformed to
514 // other satisfiable conditions and unsatisfiable conditions are
515 // transformed to other unsatisfiable conditions.
516
517 // Here is a concrete example of a unsatisfiable condition on the left
518 // implying a satisfiable condition on the right:
519 //
520 // mask = (1 << z)
521 // (x & ~mask) == y --> (x == y || x == (y | mask))
522 //
523 // Substituting y = 3, z = 0 yields:
524 // (x & -2) == 3 --> (x == 3 || x == 2)
525
526 // Pattern match a special case:
527 /*
528 QUERY( (y & ~mask = y) =>
529 ((x & ~mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y | mask)))
530 );
531 */
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000532 if (match(ICI->getOperand(0),
Chuang-Yu Cheng5078f942016-06-17 00:04:39 +0000533 m_And(m_Value(RHSVal), m_APInt(RHSC)))) {
534 APInt Mask = ~*RHSC;
Chuang-Yu Chengdbe00d52016-06-16 04:44:25 +0000535 if (Mask.isPowerOf2() && (C->getValue() & ~Mask) == C->getValue()) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000536 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000537 if (!setValueOnce(RHSVal))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000538 return false;
539
540 Vals.push_back(C);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000541 Vals.push_back(
Chuang-Yu Chengdbe00d52016-06-16 04:44:25 +0000542 ConstantInt::get(C->getContext(),
543 C->getValue() | Mask));
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000544 UsedICmps++;
545 return true;
546 }
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000547 }
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000548
Chuang-Yu Cheng68f7f1c2016-06-24 01:59:00 +0000549 // Pattern match a special case:
550 /*
551 QUERY( (y | mask = y) =>
552 ((x | mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y & ~mask)))
553 );
554 */
555 if (match(ICI->getOperand(0),
556 m_Or(m_Value(RHSVal), m_APInt(RHSC)))) {
557 APInt Mask = *RHSC;
558 if (Mask.isPowerOf2() && (C->getValue() | Mask) == C->getValue()) {
559 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
560 if (!setValueOnce(RHSVal))
561 return false;
562
563 Vals.push_back(C);
564 Vals.push_back(ConstantInt::get(C->getContext(),
565 C->getValue() & ~Mask));
566 UsedICmps++;
567 return true;
568 }
569 }
570
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000571 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000572 if (!setValueOnce(ICI->getOperand(0)))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000573 return false;
574
575 UsedICmps++;
576 Vals.push_back(C);
577 return ICI->getOperand(0);
578 }
579
580 // If we have "x ult 3", for example, then we can add 0,1,2 to the set.
Sanjoy Das7182d362015-03-18 00:41:24 +0000581 ConstantRange Span = ConstantRange::makeAllowedICmpRegion(
582 ICI->getPredicate(), C->getValue());
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000583
584 // Shift the range if the compare is fed by an add. This is the range
585 // compare idiom as emitted by instcombine.
586 Value *CandidateVal = I->getOperand(0);
Chuang-Yu Cheng5078f942016-06-17 00:04:39 +0000587 if (match(I->getOperand(0), m_Add(m_Value(RHSVal), m_APInt(RHSC)))) {
588 Span = Span.subtract(*RHSC);
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000589 CandidateVal = RHSVal;
590 }
591
592 // If this is an and/!= check, then we are looking to build the set of
593 // value that *don't* pass the and chain. I.e. to turn "x ugt 2" into
594 // x != 0 && x != 1.
595 if (!isEQ)
596 Span = Span.inverse();
597
598 // If there are a ton of values, we don't want to make a ginormous switch.
Craig Topper7e3e7af2017-05-07 22:22:11 +0000599 if (Span.isSizeLargerThan(8) || Span.isEmptySet()) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000600 return false;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000601 }
602
603 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000604 if (!setValueOnce(CandidateVal))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000605 return false;
606
607 // Add all values from the range to the set
608 for (APInt Tmp = Span.getLower(); Tmp != Span.getUpper(); ++Tmp)
609 Vals.push_back(ConstantInt::get(I->getContext(), Tmp));
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000610
611 UsedICmps++;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000612 return true;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000613 }
614
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000615 /// Given a potentially 'or'd or 'and'd together collection of icmp
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000616 /// eq/ne/lt/gt instructions that compare a value against a constant, extract
617 /// the value being compared, and stick the list constants into the Vals
618 /// vector.
619 /// One "Extra" case is allowed to differ from the other.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000620 void gather(Value *V) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000621 Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V);
622 bool isEQ = (I->getOpcode() == Instruction::Or);
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000623
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000624 // Keep a stack (SmallVector for efficiency) for depth-first traversal
625 SmallVector<Value *, 8> DFT;
Gerolf Hoflehner2432bd02016-02-03 23:54:25 +0000626 SmallPtrSet<Value *, 8> Visited;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000627
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000628 // Initialize
Gerolf Hoflehner2432bd02016-02-03 23:54:25 +0000629 Visited.insert(V);
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000630 DFT.push_back(V);
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000631
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000632 while (!DFT.empty()) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000633 V = DFT.pop_back_val();
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000634
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000635 if (Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V)) {
636 // If it is a || (or && depending on isEQ), process the operands.
637 if (I->getOpcode() == (isEQ ? Instruction::Or : Instruction::And)) {
Gerolf Hoflehner2432bd02016-02-03 23:54:25 +0000638 if (Visited.insert(I->getOperand(1)).second)
639 DFT.push_back(I->getOperand(1));
640 if (Visited.insert(I->getOperand(0)).second)
641 DFT.push_back(I->getOperand(0));
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000642 continue;
643 }
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000644
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000645 // Try to match the current instruction
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000646 if (matchInstruction(I, isEQ))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000647 // Match succeed, continue the loop
648 continue;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000649 }
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000650
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000651 // One element of the sequence of || (or &&) could not be match as a
652 // comparison against the same value as the others.
653 // We allow only one "Extra" case to be checked before the switch
654 if (!Extra) {
655 Extra = V;
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000656 continue;
657 }
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000658 // Failed to parse a proper sequence, abort now
659 CompValue = nullptr;
660 break;
Chris Lattner5a177e62010-12-13 04:26:26 +0000661 }
Anton Korobeynikov1bfd1212008-02-20 11:26:25 +0000662 }
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000663};
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000664
665} // end anonymous namespace
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +0000666
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000667static void EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(TerminatorInst *TI) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000668 Instruction *Cond = nullptr;
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000669 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
670 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(SI->getCondition());
671 } else if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
672 if (BI->isConditional())
673 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +0000674 } else if (IndirectBrInst *IBI = dyn_cast<IndirectBrInst>(TI)) {
675 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(IBI->getAddress());
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000676 }
677
678 TI->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000679 if (Cond)
680 RecursivelyDeleteTriviallyDeadInstructions(Cond);
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000681}
682
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000683/// Return true if the specified terminator checks
Chris Lattner8e84c122008-11-27 23:25:44 +0000684/// to see if a value is equal to constant integer value.
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000685Value *SimplifyCFGOpt::isValueEqualityComparison(TerminatorInst *TI) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000686 Value *CV = nullptr;
Chris Lattnera64923a2004-03-16 19:45:22 +0000687 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
688 // Do not permit merging of large switch instructions into their
689 // predecessors unless there is only one predecessor.
Vedant Kumare0b5f862018-05-10 23:01:54 +0000690 if (SI->getNumSuccessors() * pred_size(SI->getParent()) <= 128)
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000691 CV = SI->getCondition();
692 } else if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI))
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000693 if (BI->isConditional() && BI->getCondition()->hasOneUse())
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000694 if (ICmpInst *ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition())) {
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +0000695 if (ICI->isEquality() && GetConstantInt(ICI->getOperand(1), DL))
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000696 CV = ICI->getOperand(0);
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000697 }
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000698
699 // Unwrap any lossless ptrtoint cast.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000700 if (CV) {
Matt Arsenaultfa646592013-10-21 18:55:08 +0000701 if (PtrToIntInst *PTII = dyn_cast<PtrToIntInst>(CV)) {
702 Value *Ptr = PTII->getPointerOperand();
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000703 if (PTII->getType() == DL.getIntPtrType(Ptr->getType()))
Matt Arsenaultfa646592013-10-21 18:55:08 +0000704 CV = Ptr;
705 }
706 }
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000707 return CV;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000708}
709
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000710/// Given a value comparison instruction,
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000711/// decode all of the 'cases' that it represents and return the 'default' block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000712BasicBlock *SimplifyCFGOpt::GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(
713 TerminatorInst *TI, std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases) {
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000714 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000715 Cases.reserve(SI->getNumCases());
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +0000716 for (auto Case : SI->cases())
717 Cases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(Case.getCaseValue(),
718 Case.getCaseSuccessor()));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000719 return SI->getDefaultDest();
720 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000721
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000722 BranchInst *BI = cast<BranchInst>(TI);
Reid Spencer266e42b2006-12-23 06:05:41 +0000723 ICmpInst *ICI = cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition());
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000724 BasicBlock *Succ = BI->getSuccessor(ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_NE);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000725 Cases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(
726 GetConstantInt(ICI->getOperand(1), DL), Succ));
Reid Spencer266e42b2006-12-23 06:05:41 +0000727 return BI->getSuccessor(ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ);
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000728}
729
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000730/// Given a vector of bb/value pairs, remove any entries
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000731/// in the list that match the specified block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000732static void
733EliminateBlockCases(BasicBlock *BB,
734 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases) {
Benjamin Kramerc5b06782012-10-14 11:15:42 +0000735 Cases.erase(std::remove(Cases.begin(), Cases.end(), BB), Cases.end());
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000736}
737
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000738/// Return true if there are any keys in C1 that exist in C2 as well.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000739static bool ValuesOverlap(std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &C1,
740 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &C2) {
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000741 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> *V1 = &C1, *V2 = &C2;
742
743 // Make V1 be smaller than V2.
744 if (V1->size() > V2->size())
745 std::swap(V1, V2);
746
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000747 if (V1->empty())
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000748 return false;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000749 if (V1->size() == 1) {
750 // Just scan V2.
751 ConstantInt *TheVal = (*V1)[0].Value;
752 for (unsigned i = 0, e = V2->size(); i != e; ++i)
753 if (TheVal == (*V2)[i].Value)
754 return true;
755 }
756
757 // Otherwise, just sort both lists and compare element by element.
758 array_pod_sort(V1->begin(), V1->end());
759 array_pod_sort(V2->begin(), V2->end());
760 unsigned i1 = 0, i2 = 0, e1 = V1->size(), e2 = V2->size();
761 while (i1 != e1 && i2 != e2) {
762 if ((*V1)[i1].Value == (*V2)[i2].Value)
763 return true;
764 if ((*V1)[i1].Value < (*V2)[i2].Value)
765 ++i1;
766 else
767 ++i2;
768 }
769 return false;
770}
771
Easwaran Raman0a0913d2017-11-09 22:52:20 +0000772// Set branch weights on SwitchInst. This sets the metadata if there is at
773// least one non-zero weight.
774static void setBranchWeights(SwitchInst *SI, ArrayRef<uint32_t> Weights) {
775 // Check that there is at least one non-zero weight. Otherwise, pass
776 // nullptr to setMetadata which will erase the existing metadata.
777 MDNode *N = nullptr;
778 if (llvm::any_of(Weights, [](uint32_t W) { return W != 0; }))
779 N = MDBuilder(SI->getParent()->getContext()).createBranchWeights(Weights);
780 SI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, N);
781}
782
783// Similar to the above, but for branch and select instructions that take
784// exactly 2 weights.
785static void setBranchWeights(Instruction *I, uint32_t TrueWeight,
786 uint32_t FalseWeight) {
787 assert(isa<BranchInst>(I) || isa<SelectInst>(I));
788 // Check that there is at least one non-zero weight. Otherwise, pass
789 // nullptr to setMetadata which will erase the existing metadata.
790 MDNode *N = nullptr;
791 if (TrueWeight || FalseWeight)
792 N = MDBuilder(I->getParent()->getContext())
793 .createBranchWeights(TrueWeight, FalseWeight);
794 I->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, N);
795}
796
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000797/// If TI is known to be a terminator instruction and its block is known to
798/// only have a single predecessor block, check to see if that predecessor is
799/// also a value comparison with the same value, and if that comparison
800/// determines the outcome of this comparison. If so, simplify TI. This does a
801/// very limited form of jump threading.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000802bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(
803 TerminatorInst *TI, BasicBlock *Pred, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000804 Value *PredVal = isValueEqualityComparison(Pred->getTerminator());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000805 if (!PredVal)
806 return false; // Not a value comparison in predecessor.
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000807
808 Value *ThisVal = isValueEqualityComparison(TI);
809 assert(ThisVal && "This isn't a value comparison!!");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000810 if (ThisVal != PredVal)
811 return false; // Different predicates.
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000812
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000813 // TODO: Preserve branch weight metadata, similarly to how
814 // FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors preserves it.
815
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000816 // Find out information about when control will move from Pred to TI's block.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000817 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> PredCases;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000818 BasicBlock *PredDef =
819 GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(Pred->getTerminator(), PredCases);
820 EliminateBlockCases(PredDef, PredCases); // Remove default from cases.
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000821
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000822 // Find information about how control leaves this block.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000823 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> ThisCases;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000824 BasicBlock *ThisDef = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TI, ThisCases);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000825 EliminateBlockCases(ThisDef, ThisCases); // Remove default from cases.
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000826
827 // If TI's block is the default block from Pred's comparison, potentially
828 // simplify TI based on this knowledge.
829 if (PredDef == TI->getParent()) {
830 // If we are here, we know that the value is none of those cases listed in
831 // PredCases. If there are any cases in ThisCases that are in PredCases, we
832 // can simplify TI.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000833 if (!ValuesOverlap(PredCases, ThisCases))
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000834 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000835
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000836 if (isa<BranchInst>(TI)) {
837 // Okay, one of the successors of this condbr is dead. Convert it to a
838 // uncond br.
839 assert(ThisCases.size() == 1 && "Branch can only have one case!");
840 // Insert the new branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000841 Instruction *NI = Builder.CreateBr(ThisDef);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000842 (void)NI;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000843
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000844 // Remove PHI node entries for the dead edge.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000845 ThisCases[0].Dest->removePredecessor(TI->getParent());
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000846
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +0000847 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
848 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI << "Leaving: " << *NI
849 << "\n");
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000850
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000851 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(TI);
852 return true;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000853 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000854
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000855 SwitchInst *SI = cast<SwitchInst>(TI);
856 // Okay, TI has cases that are statically dead, prune them away.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000857 SmallPtrSet<Constant *, 16> DeadCases;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000858 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
859 DeadCases.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000860
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +0000861 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
862 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI);
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000863
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000864 // Collect branch weights into a vector.
865 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> Weights;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithde36e802014-11-11 21:30:22 +0000866 MDNode *MD = SI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000867 bool HasWeight = MD && (MD->getNumOperands() == 2 + SI->getNumCases());
868 if (HasWeight)
869 for (unsigned MD_i = 1, MD_e = MD->getNumOperands(); MD_i < MD_e;
870 ++MD_i) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5bf8fef2014-12-09 18:38:53 +0000871 ConstantInt *CI = mdconst::extract<ConstantInt>(MD->getOperand(MD_i));
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000872 Weights.push_back(CI->getValue().getZExtValue());
873 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000874 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_end(), e = SI->case_begin(); i != e;) {
875 --i;
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +0000876 if (DeadCases.count(i->getCaseValue())) {
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000877 if (HasWeight) {
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +0000878 std::swap(Weights[i->getCaseIndex() + 1], Weights.back());
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000879 Weights.pop_back();
880 }
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +0000881 i->getCaseSuccessor()->removePredecessor(TI->getParent());
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000882 SI->removeCase(i);
883 }
884 }
Manman Ren97c18762012-10-11 22:28:34 +0000885 if (HasWeight && Weights.size() >= 2)
Easwaran Raman0a0913d2017-11-09 22:52:20 +0000886 setBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000887
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +0000888 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Leaving: " << *TI << "\n");
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000889 return true;
890 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000891
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000892 // Otherwise, TI's block must correspond to some matched value. Find out
893 // which value (or set of values) this is.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000894 ConstantInt *TIV = nullptr;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000895 BasicBlock *TIBB = TI->getParent();
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000896 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
897 if (PredCases[i].Dest == TIBB) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000898 if (TIV)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000899 return false; // Cannot handle multiple values coming to this block.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000900 TIV = PredCases[i].Value;
901 }
902 assert(TIV && "No edge from pred to succ?");
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000903
904 // Okay, we found the one constant that our value can be if we get into TI's
905 // BB. Find out which successor will unconditionally be branched to.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000906 BasicBlock *TheRealDest = nullptr;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000907 for (unsigned i = 0, e = ThisCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
908 if (ThisCases[i].Value == TIV) {
909 TheRealDest = ThisCases[i].Dest;
910 break;
911 }
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000912
913 // If not handled by any explicit cases, it is handled by the default case.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000914 if (!TheRealDest)
915 TheRealDest = ThisDef;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000916
917 // Remove PHI node entries for dead edges.
918 BasicBlock *CheckEdge = TheRealDest;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +0000919 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(TIBB))
920 if (Succ != CheckEdge)
921 Succ->removePredecessor(TIBB);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000922 else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000923 CheckEdge = nullptr;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000924
925 // Insert the new branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000926 Instruction *NI = Builder.CreateBr(TheRealDest);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000927 (void)NI;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000928
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +0000929 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
930 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI << "Leaving: " << *NI
931 << "\n");
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000932
933 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(TI);
934 return true;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000935}
936
Dale Johannesen7f99d222009-03-12 21:01:11 +0000937namespace {
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000938
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000939/// This class implements a stable ordering of constant
940/// integers that does not depend on their address. This is important for
941/// applications that sort ConstantInt's to ensure uniqueness.
942struct ConstantIntOrdering {
943 bool operator()(const ConstantInt *LHS, const ConstantInt *RHS) const {
944 return LHS->getValue().ult(RHS->getValue());
945 }
946};
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000947
948} // end anonymous namespace
Dale Johannesen5a41b2d2009-03-12 01:00:26 +0000949
Benjamin Kramer8817cca2013-09-22 14:09:50 +0000950static int ConstantIntSortPredicate(ConstantInt *const *P1,
951 ConstantInt *const *P2) {
952 const ConstantInt *LHS = *P1;
953 const ConstantInt *RHS = *P2;
Benjamin Kramer7d537ae2016-02-20 10:40:42 +0000954 if (LHS == RHS)
Chris Lattnere893e262010-12-15 04:52:41 +0000955 return 0;
Benjamin Kramer7d537ae2016-02-20 10:40:42 +0000956 return LHS->getValue().ult(RHS->getValue()) ? 1 : -1;
Chris Lattner7c8e6042010-12-13 02:00:58 +0000957}
958
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000959static inline bool HasBranchWeights(const Instruction *I) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithde36e802014-11-11 21:30:22 +0000960 MDNode *ProfMD = I->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000961 if (ProfMD && ProfMD->getOperand(0))
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000962 if (MDString *MDS = dyn_cast<MDString>(ProfMD->getOperand(0)))
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000963 return MDS->getString().equals("branch_weights");
964
965 return false;
966}
967
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000968/// Get Weights of a given TerminatorInst, the default weight is at the front
969/// of the vector. If TI is a conditional eq, we need to swap the branch-weight
970/// metadata.
971static void GetBranchWeights(TerminatorInst *TI,
972 SmallVectorImpl<uint64_t> &Weights) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithde36e802014-11-11 21:30:22 +0000973 MDNode *MD = TI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000974 assert(MD);
975 for (unsigned i = 1, e = MD->getNumOperands(); i < e; ++i) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5bf8fef2014-12-09 18:38:53 +0000976 ConstantInt *CI = mdconst::extract<ConstantInt>(MD->getOperand(i));
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000977 Weights.push_back(CI->getValue().getZExtValue());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000978 }
979
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000980 // If TI is a conditional eq, the default case is the false case,
981 // and the corresponding branch-weight data is at index 2. We swap the
982 // default weight to be the first entry.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000983 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000984 assert(Weights.size() == 2);
985 ICmpInst *ICI = cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition());
986 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
987 std::swap(Weights.front(), Weights.back());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000988 }
989}
990
Sanjay Patel84a0bf62016-05-06 17:51:37 +0000991/// Keep halving the weights until all can fit in uint32_t.
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000992static void FitWeights(MutableArrayRef<uint64_t> Weights) {
Benjamin Kramer79da9412014-03-09 14:42:55 +0000993 uint64_t Max = *std::max_element(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
994 if (Max > UINT_MAX) {
995 unsigned Offset = 32 - countLeadingZeros(Max);
996 for (uint64_t &I : Weights)
997 I >>= Offset;
Manman Renf1cb16e2014-01-27 23:39:03 +0000998 }
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000999}
1000
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001001/// The specified terminator is a value equality comparison instruction
1002/// (either a switch or a branch on "X == c").
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +00001003/// See if any of the predecessors of the terminator block are value comparisons
1004/// on the same value. If so, and if safe to do so, fold them together.
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00001005bool SimplifyCFGOpt::FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(TerminatorInst *TI,
1006 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001007 BasicBlock *BB = TI->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001008 Value *CV = isValueEqualityComparison(TI); // CondVal
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001009 assert(CV && "Not a comparison?");
1010 bool Changed = false;
1011
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001012 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 16> Preds(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001013 while (!Preds.empty()) {
Dan Gohman9a6fef02009-05-06 17:22:41 +00001014 BasicBlock *Pred = Preds.pop_back_val();
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001015
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001016 // See if the predecessor is a comparison with the same value.
1017 TerminatorInst *PTI = Pred->getTerminator();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001018 Value *PCV = isValueEqualityComparison(PTI); // PredCondVal
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001019
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +00001020 if (PCV == CV && TI != PTI) {
James Molloy21744682016-09-01 09:01:34 +00001021 SmallSetVector<BasicBlock*, 4> FailBlocks;
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +00001022 if (!SafeToMergeTerminators(TI, PTI, &FailBlocks)) {
1023 for (auto *Succ : FailBlocks) {
Benjamin Kramer46f5e2c2017-03-24 14:15:35 +00001024 if (!SplitBlockPredecessors(Succ, TI->getParent(), ".fold.split"))
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +00001025 return false;
1026 }
1027 }
1028
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001029 // Figure out which 'cases' to copy from SI to PSI.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001030 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> BBCases;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001031 BasicBlock *BBDefault = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TI, BBCases);
1032
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001033 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> PredCases;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001034 BasicBlock *PredDefault = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(PTI, PredCases);
1035
1036 // Based on whether the default edge from PTI goes to BB or not, fill in
1037 // PredCases and PredDefault with the new switch cases we would like to
1038 // build.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001039 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> NewSuccessors;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001040
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001041 // Update the branch weight metadata along the way
1042 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001043 bool PredHasWeights = HasBranchWeights(PTI);
1044 bool SuccHasWeights = HasBranchWeights(TI);
1045
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +00001046 if (PredHasWeights) {
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001047 GetBranchWeights(PTI, Weights);
Andrew Trick7656f6d2012-11-15 18:40:31 +00001048 // branch-weight metadata is inconsistent here.
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +00001049 if (Weights.size() != 1 + PredCases.size())
1050 PredHasWeights = SuccHasWeights = false;
1051 } else if (SuccHasWeights)
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001052 // If there are no predecessor weights but there are successor weights,
1053 // populate Weights with 1, which will later be scaled to the sum of
1054 // successor's weights
1055 Weights.assign(1 + PredCases.size(), 1);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001056
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001057 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> SuccWeights;
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +00001058 if (SuccHasWeights) {
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001059 GetBranchWeights(TI, SuccWeights);
Andrew Trick7656f6d2012-11-15 18:40:31 +00001060 // branch-weight metadata is inconsistent here.
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +00001061 if (SuccWeights.size() != 1 + BBCases.size())
1062 PredHasWeights = SuccHasWeights = false;
1063 } else if (PredHasWeights)
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001064 SuccWeights.assign(1 + BBCases.size(), 1);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001065
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001066 if (PredDefault == BB) {
1067 // If this is the default destination from PTI, only the edges in TI
1068 // that don't occur in PTI, or that branch to BB will be activated.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001069 std::set<ConstantInt *, ConstantIntOrdering> PTIHandled;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001070 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1071 if (PredCases[i].Dest != BB)
1072 PTIHandled.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
1073 else {
1074 // The default destination is BB, we don't need explicit targets.
1075 std::swap(PredCases[i], PredCases.back());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001076
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001077 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
1078 // Increase weight for the default case.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001079 Weights[0] += Weights[i + 1];
1080 std::swap(Weights[i + 1], Weights.back());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001081 Weights.pop_back();
1082 }
1083
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001084 PredCases.pop_back();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001085 --i;
1086 --e;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001087 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001088
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001089 // Reconstruct the new switch statement we will be building.
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001090 if (PredDefault != BBDefault) {
1091 PredDefault->removePredecessor(Pred);
1092 PredDefault = BBDefault;
1093 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBDefault);
1094 }
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001095
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001096 unsigned CasesFromPred = Weights.size();
1097 uint64_t ValidTotalSuccWeight = 0;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001098 for (unsigned i = 0, e = BBCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1099 if (!PTIHandled.count(BBCases[i].Value) &&
1100 BBCases[i].Dest != BBDefault) {
1101 PredCases.push_back(BBCases[i]);
1102 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBCases[i].Dest);
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001103 if (SuccHasWeights || PredHasWeights) {
1104 // The default weight is at index 0, so weight for the ith case
1105 // should be at index i+1. Scale the cases from successor by
1106 // PredDefaultWeight (Weights[0]).
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001107 Weights.push_back(Weights[0] * SuccWeights[i + 1]);
1108 ValidTotalSuccWeight += SuccWeights[i + 1];
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001109 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001110 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001111
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001112 if (SuccHasWeights || PredHasWeights) {
1113 ValidTotalSuccWeight += SuccWeights[0];
1114 // Scale the cases from predecessor by ValidTotalSuccWeight.
1115 for (unsigned i = 1; i < CasesFromPred; ++i)
1116 Weights[i] *= ValidTotalSuccWeight;
1117 // Scale the default weight by SuccDefaultWeight (SuccWeights[0]).
1118 Weights[0] *= SuccWeights[0];
1119 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001120 } else {
1121 // If this is not the default destination from PSI, only the edges
1122 // in SI that occur in PSI with a destination of BB will be
1123 // activated.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001124 std::set<ConstantInt *, ConstantIntOrdering> PTIHandled;
1125 std::map<ConstantInt *, uint64_t> WeightsForHandled;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001126 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1127 if (PredCases[i].Dest == BB) {
1128 PTIHandled.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +00001129
1130 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001131 WeightsForHandled[PredCases[i].Value] = Weights[i + 1];
1132 std::swap(Weights[i + 1], Weights.back());
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +00001133 Weights.pop_back();
1134 }
1135
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001136 std::swap(PredCases[i], PredCases.back());
1137 PredCases.pop_back();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001138 --i;
1139 --e;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001140 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001141
1142 // Okay, now we know which constants were sent to BB from the
1143 // predecessor. Figure out where they will all go now.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001144 for (unsigned i = 0, e = BBCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1145 if (PTIHandled.count(BBCases[i].Value)) {
1146 // If this is one we are capable of getting...
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +00001147 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights)
1148 Weights.push_back(WeightsForHandled[BBCases[i].Value]);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001149 PredCases.push_back(BBCases[i]);
1150 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBCases[i].Dest);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001151 PTIHandled.erase(
1152 BBCases[i].Value); // This constant is taken care of
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001153 }
1154
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001155 // If there are any constants vectored to BB that TI doesn't handle,
1156 // they must go to the default destination of TI.
Benjamin Kramer135f7352016-06-26 12:28:59 +00001157 for (ConstantInt *I : PTIHandled) {
Andrew Trick90f50292012-11-15 18:40:29 +00001158 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights)
Benjamin Kramer135f7352016-06-26 12:28:59 +00001159 Weights.push_back(WeightsForHandled[I]);
1160 PredCases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(I, BBDefault));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001161 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBDefault);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001162 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001163 }
1164
1165 // Okay, at this point, we know which new successor Pred will get. Make
1166 // sure we update the number of entries in the PHI nodes for these
1167 // successors.
Sanjay Patelf4b34b72015-09-10 16:25:38 +00001168 for (BasicBlock *NewSuccessor : NewSuccessors)
1169 AddPredecessorToBlock(NewSuccessor, Pred, BB);
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001170
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00001171 Builder.SetInsertPoint(PTI);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00001172 // Convert pointer to int before we switch.
Duncan Sands19d0b472010-02-16 11:11:14 +00001173 if (CV->getType()->isPointerTy()) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001174 CV = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(CV, DL.getIntPtrType(CV->getType()),
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00001175 "magicptr");
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00001176 }
1177
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001178 // Now that the successors are updated, create the new Switch instruction.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001179 SwitchInst *NewSI =
1180 Builder.CreateSwitch(CV, PredDefault, PredCases.size());
Devang Patelb849cd52011-05-17 23:29:05 +00001181 NewSI->setDebugLoc(PTI->getDebugLoc());
Sanjay Patel5e7bd912015-09-10 16:15:21 +00001182 for (ValueEqualityComparisonCase &V : PredCases)
1183 NewSI->addCase(V.Value, V.Dest);
Chris Lattner3215bb62005-01-01 16:02:12 +00001184
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001185 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
1186 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
1187 FitWeights(Weights);
1188
1189 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
1190
Easwaran Raman0a0913d2017-11-09 22:52:20 +00001191 setBranchWeights(NewSI, MDWeights);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001192 }
1193
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00001194 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(PTI);
Chris Lattner3215bb62005-01-01 16:02:12 +00001195
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001196 // Okay, last check. If BB is still a successor of PSI, then we must
1197 // have an infinite loop case. If so, add an infinitely looping block
1198 // to handle the case to preserve the behavior of the code.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001199 BasicBlock *InfLoopBlock = nullptr;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001200 for (unsigned i = 0, e = NewSI->getNumSuccessors(); i != e; ++i)
1201 if (NewSI->getSuccessor(i) == BB) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001202 if (!InfLoopBlock) {
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00001203 // Insert it at the end of the function, because it's either code,
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001204 // or it won't matter if it's hot. :)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001205 InfLoopBlock = BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), "infloop",
1206 BB->getParent());
Gabor Greife9ecc682008-04-06 20:25:17 +00001207 BranchInst::Create(InfLoopBlock, InfLoopBlock);
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001208 }
1209 NewSI->setSuccessor(i, InfLoopBlock);
1210 }
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001211
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001212 Changed = true;
1213 }
1214 }
1215 return Changed;
1216}
1217
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001218// If we would need to insert a select that uses the value of this invoke
1219// (comments in HoistThenElseCodeToIf explain why we would need to do this), we
1220// can't hoist the invoke, as there is nowhere to put the select in this case.
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001221static bool isSafeToHoistInvoke(BasicBlock *BB1, BasicBlock *BB2,
1222 Instruction *I1, Instruction *I2) {
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001223 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1)) {
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00001224 for (const PHINode &PN : Succ->phis()) {
1225 Value *BB1V = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1226 Value *BB2V = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001227 if (BB1V != BB2V && (BB1V == I1 || BB2V == I2)) {
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001228 return false;
1229 }
1230 }
1231 }
1232 return true;
1233}
1234
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001235static bool passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(Value *V, Instruction *I);
1236
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001237/// Given a conditional branch that goes to BB1 and BB2, hoist any common code
1238/// in the two blocks up into the branch block. The caller of this function
1239/// guarantees that BI's block dominates BB1 and BB2.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001240static bool HoistThenElseCodeToIf(BranchInst *BI,
Chad Rosier54390052015-02-23 19:15:16 +00001241 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001242 // This does very trivial matching, with limited scanning, to find identical
1243 // instructions in the two blocks. In particular, we don't want to get into
1244 // O(M*N) situations here where M and N are the sizes of BB1 and BB2. As
1245 // such, we currently just scan for obviously identical instructions in an
1246 // identical order.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001247 BasicBlock *BB1 = BI->getSuccessor(0); // The true destination.
1248 BasicBlock *BB2 = BI->getSuccessor(1); // The false destination
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001249
Devang Patelf10e2872009-02-04 00:03:08 +00001250 BasicBlock::iterator BB1_Itr = BB1->begin();
1251 BasicBlock::iterator BB2_Itr = BB2->begin();
1252
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001253 Instruction *I1 = &*BB1_Itr++, *I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
Ulrich Weigand019dd232018-03-09 22:00:10 +00001254 // Skip debug info if it is not identical.
1255 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI1 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1);
1256 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI2 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2);
1257 if (!DBI1 || !DBI2 || !DBI1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(DBI2)) {
1258 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1))
1259 I1 = &*BB1_Itr++;
1260 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2))
1261 I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
1262 }
1263 if (isa<PHINode>(I1) || !I1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(I2) ||
1264 (isa<InvokeInst>(I1) && !isSafeToHoistInvoke(BB1, BB2, I1, I2)))
1265 return false;
1266
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001267 BasicBlock *BIParent = BI->getParent();
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001268
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001269 bool Changed = false;
Ulrich Weigand019dd232018-03-09 22:00:10 +00001270 do {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001271 // If we are hoisting the terminator instruction, don't move one (making a
1272 // broken BB), instead clone it, and remove BI.
Chandler Carruth9ae926b2018-08-26 09:51:22 +00001273 if (I1->isTerminator())
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001274 goto HoistTerminator;
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001275
Davide Italiano9f074fe2017-12-31 16:47:16 +00001276 // If we're going to hoist a call, make sure that the two instructions we're
1277 // commoning/hoisting are both marked with musttail, or neither of them is
1278 // marked as such. Otherwise, we might end up in a situation where we hoist
1279 // from a block where the terminator is a `ret` to a block where the terminator
1280 // is a `br`, and `musttail` calls expect to be followed by a return.
1281 auto *C1 = dyn_cast<CallInst>(I1);
1282 auto *C2 = dyn_cast<CallInst>(I2);
1283 if (C1 && C2)
1284 if (C1->isMustTailCall() != C2->isMustTailCall())
Davide Italiano86b79492017-12-31 16:54:03 +00001285 return Changed;
Davide Italiano9f074fe2017-12-31 16:47:16 +00001286
Chad Rosier54390052015-02-23 19:15:16 +00001287 if (!TTI.isProfitableToHoist(I1) || !TTI.isProfitableToHoist(I2))
1288 return Changed;
1289
Ulrich Weigandf4ceef82018-03-15 12:28:48 +00001290 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1) || isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2)) {
1291 assert (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1) && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2));
1292 // The debug location is an integral part of a debug info intrinsic
1293 // and can't be separated from it or replaced. Instead of attempting
1294 // to merge locations, simply hoist both copies of the intrinsic.
1295 BIParent->getInstList().splice(BI->getIterator(),
1296 BB1->getInstList(), I1);
1297 BIParent->getInstList().splice(BI->getIterator(),
1298 BB2->getInstList(), I2);
1299 Changed = true;
1300 } else {
1301 // For a normal instruction, we just move one to right before the branch,
1302 // then replace all uses of the other with the first. Finally, we remove
1303 // the now redundant second instruction.
1304 BIParent->getInstList().splice(BI->getIterator(),
1305 BB1->getInstList(), I1);
1306 if (!I2->use_empty())
1307 I2->replaceAllUsesWith(I1);
1308 I1->andIRFlags(I2);
1309 unsigned KnownIDs[] = {LLVMContext::MD_tbaa,
1310 LLVMContext::MD_range,
1311 LLVMContext::MD_fpmath,
1312 LLVMContext::MD_invariant_load,
1313 LLVMContext::MD_nonnull,
1314 LLVMContext::MD_invariant_group,
1315 LLVMContext::MD_align,
1316 LLVMContext::MD_dereferenceable,
1317 LLVMContext::MD_dereferenceable_or_null,
1318 LLVMContext::MD_mem_parallel_loop_access};
Florian Hahn406f1ff2018-08-24 11:40:04 +00001319 combineMetadata(I1, I2, KnownIDs, true);
Dehao Chen87823f82016-09-08 21:53:33 +00001320
Ulrich Weigandf4ceef82018-03-15 12:28:48 +00001321 // I1 and I2 are being combined into a single instruction. Its debug
1322 // location is the merged locations of the original instructions.
1323 I1->applyMergedLocation(I1->getDebugLoc(), I2->getDebugLoc());
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001324
Ulrich Weigandf4ceef82018-03-15 12:28:48 +00001325 I2->eraseFromParent();
1326 Changed = true;
1327 }
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001328
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001329 I1 = &*BB1_Itr++;
1330 I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
Ulrich Weigand019dd232018-03-09 22:00:10 +00001331 // Skip debug info if it is not identical.
1332 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI1 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1);
1333 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI2 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2);
1334 if (!DBI1 || !DBI2 || !DBI1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(DBI2)) {
1335 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1))
1336 I1 = &*BB1_Itr++;
1337 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2))
1338 I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
1339 }
1340 } while (I1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(I2));
1341
1342 return true;
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001343
1344HoistTerminator:
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001345 // It may not be possible to hoist an invoke.
1346 if (isa<InvokeInst>(I1) && !isSafeToHoistInvoke(BB1, BB2, I1, I2))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001347 return Changed;
1348
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001349 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1)) {
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00001350 for (PHINode &PN : Succ->phis()) {
1351 Value *BB1V = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1352 Value *BB2V = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001353 if (BB1V == BB2V)
1354 continue;
1355
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001356 // Check for passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined here because we would rather
1357 // eliminate undefined control flow then converting it to a select.
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00001358 if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(BB1V, &PN) ||
1359 passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(BB2V, &PN))
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001360 return Changed;
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001361
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001362 if (isa<ConstantExpr>(BB1V) && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(BB1V))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001363 return Changed;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001364 if (isa<ConstantExpr>(BB2V) && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(BB2V))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001365 return Changed;
1366 }
1367 }
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001368
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001369 // Okay, it is safe to hoist the terminator.
Nick Lewycky42fb7452009-09-27 07:38:41 +00001370 Instruction *NT = I1->clone();
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001371 BIParent->getInstList().insert(BI->getIterator(), NT);
Benjamin Kramerccce8ba2010-01-05 13:12:22 +00001372 if (!NT->getType()->isVoidTy()) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001373 I1->replaceAllUsesWith(NT);
1374 I2->replaceAllUsesWith(NT);
Chris Lattner8dd4cae2007-02-11 01:37:51 +00001375 NT->takeName(I1);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001376 }
1377
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00001378 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(NT);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001379 // Hoisting one of the terminators from our successor is a great thing.
1380 // Unfortunately, the successors of the if/else blocks may have PHI nodes in
1381 // them. If they do, all PHI entries for BB1/BB2 must agree for all PHI
1382 // nodes, so we insert select instruction to compute the final result.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001383 std::map<std::pair<Value *, Value *>, SelectInst *> InsertedSelects;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001384 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1)) {
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00001385 for (PHINode &PN : Succ->phis()) {
1386 Value *BB1V = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1387 Value *BB2V = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001388 if (BB1V == BB2V)
1389 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001390
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001391 // These values do not agree. Insert a select instruction before NT
1392 // that determines the right value.
1393 SelectInst *&SI = InsertedSelects[std::make_pair(BB1V, BB2V)];
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001394 if (!SI)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001395 SI = cast<SelectInst>(
1396 Builder.CreateSelect(BI->getCondition(), BB1V, BB2V,
1397 BB1V->getName() + "." + BB2V->getName(), BI));
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00001398
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001399 // Make the PHI node use the select for all incoming values for BB1/BB2
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00001400 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PN.getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i)
1401 if (PN.getIncomingBlock(i) == BB1 || PN.getIncomingBlock(i) == BB2)
1402 PN.setIncomingValue(i, SI);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001403 }
1404 }
1405
1406 // Update any PHI nodes in our new successors.
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001407 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1))
1408 AddPredecessorToBlock(Succ, BIParent, BB1);
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001409
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00001410 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001411 return true;
1412}
1413
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001414// All instructions in Insts belong to different blocks that all unconditionally
1415// branch to a common successor. Analyze each instruction and return true if it
1416// would be possible to sink them into their successor, creating one common
1417// instruction instead. For every value that would be required to be provided by
1418// PHI node (because an operand varies in each input block), add to PHIOperands.
1419static bool canSinkInstructions(
1420 ArrayRef<Instruction *> Insts,
1421 DenseMap<Instruction *, SmallVector<Value *, 4>> &PHIOperands) {
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001422 // Prune out obviously bad instructions to move. Any non-store instruction
1423 // must have exactly one use, and we check later that use is by a single,
1424 // common PHI instruction in the successor.
1425 for (auto *I : Insts) {
1426 // These instructions may change or break semantics if moved.
1427 if (isa<PHINode>(I) || I->isEHPad() || isa<AllocaInst>(I) ||
1428 I->getType()->isTokenTy())
1429 return false;
Akira Hatanaka4ec7b202017-01-25 06:21:51 +00001430
1431 // Conservatively return false if I is an inline-asm instruction. Sinking
1432 // and merging inline-asm instructions can potentially create arguments
1433 // that cannot satisfy the inline-asm constraints.
1434 if (const auto *C = dyn_cast<CallInst>(I))
1435 if (C->isInlineAsm())
1436 return false;
1437
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001438 // Everything must have only one use too, apart from stores which
1439 // have no uses.
1440 if (!isa<StoreInst>(I) && !I->hasOneUse())
1441 return false;
1442 }
1443
1444 const Instruction *I0 = Insts.front();
1445 for (auto *I : Insts)
1446 if (!I->isSameOperationAs(I0))
1447 return false;
1448
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001449 // All instructions in Insts are known to be the same opcode. If they aren't
1450 // stores, check the only user of each is a PHI or in the same block as the
1451 // instruction, because if a user is in the same block as an instruction
1452 // we're contemplating sinking, it must already be determined to be sinkable.
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001453 if (!isa<StoreInst>(I0)) {
1454 auto *PNUse = dyn_cast<PHINode>(*I0->user_begin());
James Molloy6c009c12016-09-07 09:01:22 +00001455 auto *Succ = I0->getParent()->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
Eric Liu8c7d28b2017-03-15 15:29:42 +00001456 if (!all_of(Insts, [&PNUse,&Succ](const Instruction *I) -> bool {
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001457 auto *U = cast<Instruction>(*I->user_begin());
Eric Liu8c7d28b2017-03-15 15:29:42 +00001458 return (PNUse &&
1459 PNUse->getParent() == Succ &&
1460 PNUse->getIncomingValueForBlock(I->getParent()) == I) ||
1461 U->getParent() == I->getParent();
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001462 }))
1463 return false;
1464 }
1465
Aditya Kumar24f6ad512017-03-16 14:09:18 +00001466 // Because SROA can't handle speculating stores of selects, try not
1467 // to sink loads or stores of allocas when we'd have to create a PHI for
1468 // the address operand. Also, because it is likely that loads or stores
1469 // of allocas will disappear when Mem2Reg/SROA is run, don't sink them.
1470 // This can cause code churn which can have unintended consequences down
1471 // the line - see https://llvm.org/bugs/show_bug.cgi?id=30244.
1472 // FIXME: This is a workaround for a deficiency in SROA - see
1473 // https://llvm.org/bugs/show_bug.cgi?id=30188
1474 if (isa<StoreInst>(I0) && any_of(Insts, [](const Instruction *I) {
1475 return isa<AllocaInst>(I->getOperand(1));
1476 }))
1477 return false;
1478 if (isa<LoadInst>(I0) && any_of(Insts, [](const Instruction *I) {
1479 return isa<AllocaInst>(I->getOperand(0));
1480 }))
1481 return false;
1482
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001483 for (unsigned OI = 0, OE = I0->getNumOperands(); OI != OE; ++OI) {
1484 if (I0->getOperand(OI)->getType()->isTokenTy())
1485 // Don't touch any operand of token type.
1486 return false;
James Molloy104370a2016-09-11 09:00:03 +00001487
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001488 auto SameAsI0 = [&I0, OI](const Instruction *I) {
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001489 assert(I->getNumOperands() == I0->getNumOperands());
1490 return I->getOperand(OI) == I0->getOperand(OI);
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001491 };
1492 if (!all_of(Insts, SameAsI0)) {
1493 if (!canReplaceOperandWithVariable(I0, OI))
1494 // We can't create a PHI from this GEP.
1495 return false;
James Molloy923e98c2016-08-31 10:46:16 +00001496 // Don't create indirect calls! The called value is the final operand.
1497 if ((isa<CallInst>(I0) || isa<InvokeInst>(I0)) && OI == OE - 1) {
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001498 // FIXME: if the call was *already* indirect, we should do this.
1499 return false;
James Molloy923e98c2016-08-31 10:46:16 +00001500 }
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001501 for (auto *I : Insts)
1502 PHIOperands[I].push_back(I->getOperand(OI));
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001503 }
1504 }
1505 return true;
1506}
1507
1508// Assuming canSinkLastInstruction(Blocks) has returned true, sink the last
1509// instruction of every block in Blocks to their common successor, commoning
1510// into one instruction.
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001511static bool sinkLastInstruction(ArrayRef<BasicBlock*> Blocks) {
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001512 auto *BBEnd = Blocks[0]->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
1513
1514 // canSinkLastInstruction returning true guarantees that every block has at
1515 // least one non-terminator instruction.
1516 SmallVector<Instruction*,4> Insts;
Dehao Chen018a3af2016-10-17 19:28:44 +00001517 for (auto *BB : Blocks) {
1518 Instruction *I = BB->getTerminator();
1519 do {
1520 I = I->getPrevNode();
1521 } while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I) && I != &BB->front());
1522 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
1523 Insts.push_back(I);
1524 }
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001525
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001526 // The only checking we need to do now is that all users of all instructions
1527 // are the same PHI node. canSinkLastInstruction should have checked this but
1528 // it is slightly over-aggressive - it gets confused by commutative instructions
1529 // so double-check it here.
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001530 Instruction *I0 = Insts.front();
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001531 if (!isa<StoreInst>(I0)) {
1532 auto *PNUse = dyn_cast<PHINode>(*I0->user_begin());
1533 if (!all_of(Insts, [&PNUse](const Instruction *I) -> bool {
1534 auto *U = cast<Instruction>(*I->user_begin());
1535 return U == PNUse;
1536 }))
1537 return false;
1538 }
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001539
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001540 // We don't need to do any more checking here; canSinkLastInstruction should
1541 // have done it all for us.
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001542 SmallVector<Value*, 4> NewOperands;
1543 for (unsigned O = 0, E = I0->getNumOperands(); O != E; ++O) {
1544 // This check is different to that in canSinkLastInstruction. There, we
1545 // cared about the global view once simplifycfg (and instcombine) have
1546 // completed - it takes into account PHIs that become trivially
1547 // simplifiable. However here we need a more local view; if an operand
1548 // differs we create a PHI and rely on instcombine to clean up the very
1549 // small mess we may make.
1550 bool NeedPHI = any_of(Insts, [&I0, O](const Instruction *I) {
1551 return I->getOperand(O) != I0->getOperand(O);
1552 });
1553 if (!NeedPHI) {
1554 NewOperands.push_back(I0->getOperand(O));
1555 continue;
1556 }
1557
1558 // Create a new PHI in the successor block and populate it.
1559 auto *Op = I0->getOperand(O);
1560 assert(!Op->getType()->isTokenTy() && "Can't PHI tokens!");
1561 auto *PN = PHINode::Create(Op->getType(), Insts.size(),
1562 Op->getName() + ".sink", &BBEnd->front());
1563 for (auto *I : Insts)
1564 PN->addIncoming(I->getOperand(O), I->getParent());
1565 NewOperands.push_back(PN);
1566 }
1567
1568 // Arbitrarily use I0 as the new "common" instruction; remap its operands
1569 // and move it to the start of the successor block.
1570 for (unsigned O = 0, E = I0->getNumOperands(); O != E; ++O)
1571 I0->getOperandUse(O).set(NewOperands[O]);
1572 I0->moveBefore(&*BBEnd->getFirstInsertionPt());
1573
Robert Lougher5bf04162017-01-04 17:40:32 +00001574 // Update metadata and IR flags, and merge debug locations.
James Molloyd13b1232016-08-30 10:56:08 +00001575 for (auto *I : Insts)
James Molloy0efb96a2016-09-19 08:23:08 +00001576 if (I != I0) {
Dehao Chenf4646272017-10-02 18:13:14 +00001577 // The debug location for the "common" instruction is the merged locations
1578 // of all the commoned instructions. We start with the original location
1579 // of the "common" instruction and iteratively merge each location in the
1580 // loop below.
1581 // This is an N-way merge, which will be inefficient if I0 is a CallInst.
1582 // However, as N-way merge for CallInst is rare, so we use simplified API
1583 // instead of using complex API for N-way merge.
1584 I0->applyMergedLocation(I0->getDebugLoc(), I->getDebugLoc());
Florian Hahn406f1ff2018-08-24 11:40:04 +00001585 combineMetadataForCSE(I0, I, true);
James Molloy0efb96a2016-09-19 08:23:08 +00001586 I0->andIRFlags(I);
1587 }
James Molloyd13b1232016-08-30 10:56:08 +00001588
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001589 if (!isa<StoreInst>(I0)) {
1590 // canSinkLastInstruction checked that all instructions were used by
1591 // one and only one PHI node. Find that now, RAUW it to our common
1592 // instruction and nuke it.
1593 assert(I0->hasOneUse());
1594 auto *PN = cast<PHINode>(*I0->user_begin());
1595 PN->replaceAllUsesWith(I0);
1596 PN->eraseFromParent();
1597 }
1598
1599 // Finally nuke all instructions apart from the common instruction.
1600 for (auto *I : Insts)
1601 if (I != I0)
1602 I->eraseFromParent();
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001603
1604 return true;
1605}
1606
1607namespace {
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00001608
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001609 // LockstepReverseIterator - Iterates through instructions
1610 // in a set of blocks in reverse order from the first non-terminator.
1611 // For example (assume all blocks have size n):
1612 // LockstepReverseIterator I([B1, B2, B3]);
1613 // *I-- = [B1[n], B2[n], B3[n]];
1614 // *I-- = [B1[n-1], B2[n-1], B3[n-1]];
1615 // *I-- = [B1[n-2], B2[n-2], B3[n-2]];
1616 // ...
1617 class LockstepReverseIterator {
1618 ArrayRef<BasicBlock*> Blocks;
1619 SmallVector<Instruction*,4> Insts;
1620 bool Fail;
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00001621
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001622 public:
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00001623 LockstepReverseIterator(ArrayRef<BasicBlock*> Blocks) : Blocks(Blocks) {
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001624 reset();
1625 }
1626
1627 void reset() {
1628 Fail = false;
1629 Insts.clear();
1630 for (auto *BB : Blocks) {
Dehao Chen018a3af2016-10-17 19:28:44 +00001631 Instruction *Inst = BB->getTerminator();
1632 for (Inst = Inst->getPrevNode(); Inst && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(Inst);)
1633 Inst = Inst->getPrevNode();
1634 if (!Inst) {
1635 // Block wasn't big enough.
1636 Fail = true;
1637 return;
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001638 }
Dehao Chen018a3af2016-10-17 19:28:44 +00001639 Insts.push_back(Inst);
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001640 }
1641 }
1642
1643 bool isValid() const {
1644 return !Fail;
1645 }
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001646
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00001647 void operator--() {
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001648 if (Fail)
1649 return;
1650 for (auto *&Inst : Insts) {
Dehao Chen018a3af2016-10-17 19:28:44 +00001651 for (Inst = Inst->getPrevNode(); Inst && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(Inst);)
1652 Inst = Inst->getPrevNode();
Benjamin Kramerd8b07972016-10-15 13:15:05 +00001653 // Already at beginning of block.
1654 if (!Inst) {
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001655 Fail = true;
1656 return;
1657 }
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001658 }
1659 }
1660
1661 ArrayRef<Instruction*> operator * () const {
1662 return Insts;
1663 }
1664 };
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00001665
1666} // end anonymous namespace
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001667
Michael Zolotukhinad371e02017-12-21 01:22:13 +00001668/// Check whether BB's predecessors end with unconditional branches. If it is
1669/// true, sink any common code from the predecessors to BB.
1670/// We also allow one predecessor to end with conditional branch (but no more
1671/// than one).
1672static bool SinkCommonCodeFromPredecessors(BasicBlock *BB) {
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001673 // We support two situations:
1674 // (1) all incoming arcs are unconditional
1675 // (2) one incoming arc is conditional
1676 //
1677 // (2) is very common in switch defaults and
1678 // else-if patterns;
1679 //
1680 // if (a) f(1);
1681 // else if (b) f(2);
1682 //
1683 // produces:
1684 //
1685 // [if]
1686 // / \
1687 // [f(1)] [if]
1688 // | | \
Amaury Sechet2fec7e42017-01-23 15:13:01 +00001689 // | | |
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001690 // | [f(2)]|
1691 // \ | /
1692 // [ end ]
1693 //
1694 // [end] has two unconditional predecessor arcs and one conditional. The
1695 // conditional refers to the implicit empty 'else' arc. This conditional
1696 // arc can also be caused by an empty default block in a switch.
1697 //
1698 // In this case, we attempt to sink code from all *unconditional* arcs.
1699 // If we can sink instructions from these arcs (determined during the scan
1700 // phase below) we insert a common successor for all unconditional arcs and
1701 // connect that to [end], to enable sinking:
1702 //
1703 // [if]
1704 // / \
1705 // [x(1)] [if]
1706 // | | \
1707 // | | \
1708 // | [x(2)] |
1709 // \ / |
1710 // [sink.split] |
1711 // \ /
1712 // [ end ]
1713 //
1714 SmallVector<BasicBlock*,4> UnconditionalPreds;
1715 Instruction *Cond = nullptr;
Michael Zolotukhinad371e02017-12-21 01:22:13 +00001716 for (auto *B : predecessors(BB)) {
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001717 auto *T = B->getTerminator();
1718 if (isa<BranchInst>(T) && cast<BranchInst>(T)->isUnconditional())
1719 UnconditionalPreds.push_back(B);
1720 else if ((isa<BranchInst>(T) || isa<SwitchInst>(T)) && !Cond)
1721 Cond = T;
1722 else
1723 return false;
1724 }
1725 if (UnconditionalPreds.size() < 2)
James Molloy475f4a72016-08-22 18:13:12 +00001726 return false;
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001727
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001728 bool Changed = false;
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001729 // We take a two-step approach to tail sinking. First we scan from the end of
1730 // each block upwards in lockstep. If the n'th instruction from the end of each
1731 // block can be sunk, those instructions are added to ValuesToSink and we
1732 // carry on. If we can sink an instruction but need to PHI-merge some operands
1733 // (because they're not identical in each instruction) we add these to
1734 // PHIOperands.
1735 unsigned ScanIdx = 0;
1736 SmallPtrSet<Value*,4> InstructionsToSink;
1737 DenseMap<Instruction*, SmallVector<Value*,4>> PHIOperands;
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001738 LockstepReverseIterator LRI(UnconditionalPreds);
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001739 while (LRI.isValid() &&
1740 canSinkInstructions(*LRI, PHIOperands)) {
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00001741 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK: instruction can be sunk: " << *(*LRI)[0]
1742 << "\n");
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001743 InstructionsToSink.insert((*LRI).begin(), (*LRI).end());
1744 ++ScanIdx;
1745 --LRI;
1746 }
1747
James Molloy18d96e82016-09-11 08:07:30 +00001748 auto ProfitableToSinkInstruction = [&](LockstepReverseIterator &LRI) {
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001749 unsigned NumPHIdValues = 0;
1750 for (auto *I : *LRI)
1751 for (auto *V : PHIOperands[I])
1752 if (InstructionsToSink.count(V) == 0)
1753 ++NumPHIdValues;
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00001754 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK: #phid values: " << NumPHIdValues << "\n");
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001755 unsigned NumPHIInsts = NumPHIdValues / UnconditionalPreds.size();
1756 if ((NumPHIdValues % UnconditionalPreds.size()) != 0)
1757 NumPHIInsts++;
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001758
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001759 return NumPHIInsts <= 1;
1760 };
1761
1762 if (ScanIdx > 0 && Cond) {
James Molloy18d96e82016-09-11 08:07:30 +00001763 // Check if we would actually sink anything first! This mutates the CFG and
1764 // adds an extra block. The goal in doing this is to allow instructions that
1765 // couldn't be sunk before to be sunk - obviously, speculatable instructions
1766 // (such as trunc, add) can be sunk and predicated already. So we check that
1767 // we're going to sink at least one non-speculatable instruction.
1768 LRI.reset();
1769 unsigned Idx = 0;
1770 bool Profitable = false;
1771 while (ProfitableToSinkInstruction(LRI) && Idx < ScanIdx) {
1772 if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute((*LRI)[0])) {
1773 Profitable = true;
1774 break;
1775 }
1776 --LRI;
1777 ++Idx;
1778 }
1779 if (!Profitable)
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001780 return false;
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001781
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00001782 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK: Splitting edge\n");
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001783 // We have a conditional edge and we're going to sink some instructions.
1784 // Insert a new block postdominating all blocks we're going to sink from.
Michael Zolotukhinad371e02017-12-21 01:22:13 +00001785 if (!SplitBlockPredecessors(BB, UnconditionalPreds, ".sink.split"))
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001786 // Edges couldn't be split.
1787 return false;
1788 Changed = true;
1789 }
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001790
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001791 // Now that we've analyzed all potential sinking candidates, perform the
1792 // actual sink. We iteratively sink the last non-terminator of the source
1793 // blocks into their common successor unless doing so would require too
1794 // many PHI instructions to be generated (currently only one PHI is allowed
1795 // per sunk instruction).
1796 //
1797 // We can use InstructionsToSink to discount values needing PHI-merging that will
1798 // actually be sunk in a later iteration. This allows us to be more
1799 // aggressive in what we sink. This does allow a false positive where we
1800 // sink presuming a later value will also be sunk, but stop half way through
1801 // and never actually sink it which means we produce more PHIs than intended.
1802 // This is unlikely in practice though.
1803 for (unsigned SinkIdx = 0; SinkIdx != ScanIdx; ++SinkIdx) {
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00001804 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK: Sink: "
1805 << *UnconditionalPreds[0]->getTerminator()->getPrevNode()
1806 << "\n");
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001807
1808 // Because we've sunk every instruction in turn, the current instruction to
1809 // sink is always at index 0.
James Molloy18d96e82016-09-11 08:07:30 +00001810 LRI.reset();
1811 if (!ProfitableToSinkInstruction(LRI)) {
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001812 // Too many PHIs would be created.
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00001813 LLVM_DEBUG(
1814 dbgs() << "SINK: stopping here, too many PHIs would be created!\n");
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001815 break;
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001816 }
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001817
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001818 if (!sinkLastInstruction(UnconditionalPreds))
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001819 return Changed;
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001820 NumSinkCommons++;
1821 Changed = true;
1822 }
1823 return Changed;
1824}
1825
Adrian Prantl5f8f34e42018-05-01 15:54:18 +00001826/// Determine if we can hoist sink a sole store instruction out of a
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001827/// conditional block.
1828///
1829/// We are looking for code like the following:
1830/// BrBB:
1831/// store i32 %add, i32* %arrayidx2
1832/// ... // No other stores or function calls (we could be calling a memory
1833/// ... // function).
1834/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1835/// br i1 %cmp, label %EndBB, label %ThenBB
1836/// ThenBB:
1837/// store i32 %add5, i32* %arrayidx2
1838/// br label EndBB
1839/// EndBB:
1840/// ...
1841/// We are going to transform this into:
1842/// BrBB:
1843/// store i32 %add, i32* %arrayidx2
1844/// ... //
1845/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1846/// %add.add5 = select i1 %cmp, i32 %add, %add5
1847/// store i32 %add.add5, i32* %arrayidx2
1848/// ...
1849///
1850/// \return The pointer to the value of the previous store if the store can be
1851/// hoisted into the predecessor block. 0 otherwise.
Benjamin Kramerad5c24f2013-05-23 16:09:15 +00001852static Value *isSafeToSpeculateStore(Instruction *I, BasicBlock *BrBB,
1853 BasicBlock *StoreBB, BasicBlock *EndBB) {
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001854 StoreInst *StoreToHoist = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(I);
1855 if (!StoreToHoist)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001856 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001857
1858 // Volatile or atomic.
1859 if (!StoreToHoist->isSimple())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001860 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001861
1862 Value *StorePtr = StoreToHoist->getPointerOperand();
1863
1864 // Look for a store to the same pointer in BrBB.
Hans Wennborg0c3518e2016-05-04 15:40:57 +00001865 unsigned MaxNumInstToLookAt = 9;
Florian Hahn3df88442018-04-30 20:10:53 +00001866 for (Instruction &CurI : reverse(BrBB->instructionsWithoutDebug())) {
David Majnemerd7708772016-06-24 04:05:21 +00001867 if (!MaxNumInstToLookAt)
1868 break;
Hans Wennborg0c3518e2016-05-04 15:40:57 +00001869 --MaxNumInstToLookAt;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001870
David L Kreitzer96674172016-08-12 21:06:53 +00001871 // Could be calling an instruction that affects memory like free().
David Majnemerd7708772016-06-24 04:05:21 +00001872 if (CurI.mayHaveSideEffects() && !isa<StoreInst>(CurI))
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001873 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001874
David Majnemerd7708772016-06-24 04:05:21 +00001875 if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&CurI)) {
1876 // Found the previous store make sure it stores to the same location.
1877 if (SI->getPointerOperand() == StorePtr)
1878 // Found the previous store, return its value operand.
1879 return SI->getValueOperand();
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001880 return nullptr; // Unknown store.
David Majnemerd7708772016-06-24 04:05:21 +00001881 }
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001882 }
1883
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001884 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001885}
1886
Adrian Prantl5f8f34e42018-05-01 15:54:18 +00001887/// Speculate a conditional basic block flattening the CFG.
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001888///
Chandler Carruth8a4a1662013-01-24 08:05:06 +00001889/// Note that this is a very risky transform currently. Speculating
1890/// instructions like this is most often not desirable. Instead, there is an MI
1891/// pass which can do it with full awareness of the resource constraints.
1892/// However, some cases are "obvious" and we should do directly. An example of
1893/// this is speculating a single, reasonably cheap instruction.
1894///
1895/// There is only one distinct advantage to flattening the CFG at the IR level:
1896/// it makes very common but simplistic optimizations such as are common in
1897/// instcombine and the DAG combiner more powerful by removing CFG edges and
1898/// modeling their effects with easier to reason about SSA value graphs.
1899///
1900///
1901/// An illustration of this transform is turning this IR:
1902/// \code
1903/// BB:
1904/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1905/// br i1 %cmp, label %EndBB, label %ThenBB
1906/// ThenBB:
1907/// %sub = sub %x, %y
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001908/// br label BB2
Chandler Carruth8a4a1662013-01-24 08:05:06 +00001909/// EndBB:
1910/// %phi = phi [ %sub, %ThenBB ], [ 0, %EndBB ]
1911/// ...
1912/// \endcode
1913///
1914/// Into this IR:
1915/// \code
1916/// BB:
1917/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1918/// %sub = sub %x, %y
1919/// %cond = select i1 %cmp, 0, %sub
1920/// ...
1921/// \endcode
1922///
1923/// \returns true if the conditional block is removed.
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +00001924static bool SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BranchInst *BI, BasicBlock *ThenBB,
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00001925 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Chandler Carruth1d20c022013-01-24 08:22:40 +00001926 // Be conservative for now. FP select instruction can often be expensive.
1927 Value *BrCond = BI->getCondition();
1928 if (isa<FCmpInst>(BrCond))
1929 return false;
1930
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001931 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
1932 BasicBlock *EndBB = ThenBB->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
1933
1934 // If ThenBB is actually on the false edge of the conditional branch, remember
1935 // to swap the select operands later.
1936 bool Invert = false;
1937 if (ThenBB != BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
1938 assert(ThenBB == BI->getSuccessor(1) && "No edge from 'if' block?");
1939 Invert = true;
1940 }
1941 assert(EndBB == BI->getSuccessor(!Invert) && "No edge from to end block");
1942
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001943 // Keep a count of how many times instructions are used within CondBB when
1944 // they are candidates for sinking into CondBB. Specifically:
1945 // - They are defined in BB, and
1946 // - They have no side effects, and
1947 // - All of their uses are in CondBB.
1948 SmallDenseMap<Instruction *, unsigned, 4> SinkCandidateUseCounts;
1949
Bjorn Petterssone73b85d12017-11-02 11:55:14 +00001950 SmallVector<Instruction *, 4> SpeculatedDbgIntrinsics;
1951
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001952 unsigned SpeculationCost = 0;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001953 Value *SpeculatedStoreValue = nullptr;
1954 StoreInst *SpeculatedStore = nullptr;
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001955 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = ThenBB->begin(),
Benjamin Kramerb6d0bd42014-03-02 12:27:27 +00001956 BBE = std::prev(ThenBB->end());
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001957 BBI != BBE; ++BBI) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001958 Instruction *I = &*BBI;
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001959 // Skip debug info.
Bjorn Petterssone73b85d12017-11-02 11:55:14 +00001960 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
1961 SpeculatedDbgIntrinsics.push_back(I);
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001962 continue;
Bjorn Petterssone73b85d12017-11-02 11:55:14 +00001963 }
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001964
Mark Lacey274f48b2015-04-12 18:18:51 +00001965 // Only speculatively execute a single instruction (not counting the
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001966 // terminator) for now.
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00001967 ++SpeculationCost;
1968 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001969 return false;
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001970
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001971 // Don't hoist the instruction if it's unsafe or expensive.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001972 if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I) &&
1973 !(HoistCondStores && (SpeculatedStoreValue = isSafeToSpeculateStore(
1974 I, BB, ThenBB, EndBB))))
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001975 return false;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001976 if (!SpeculatedStoreValue &&
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001977 ComputeSpeculationCost(I, TTI) >
1978 PHINodeFoldingThreshold * TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic)
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001979 return false;
1980
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001981 // Store the store speculation candidate.
1982 if (SpeculatedStoreValue)
1983 SpeculatedStore = cast<StoreInst>(I);
1984
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001985 // Do not hoist the instruction if any of its operands are defined but not
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001986 // used in BB. The transformation will prevent the operand from
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001987 // being sunk into the use block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001988 for (User::op_iterator i = I->op_begin(), e = I->op_end(); i != e; ++i) {
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001989 Instruction *OpI = dyn_cast<Instruction>(*i);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001990 if (!OpI || OpI->getParent() != BB || OpI->mayHaveSideEffects())
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001991 continue; // Not a candidate for sinking.
1992
1993 ++SinkCandidateUseCounts[OpI];
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001994 }
1995 }
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001996
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001997 // Consider any sink candidates which are only used in CondBB as costs for
1998 // speculation. Note, while we iterate over a DenseMap here, we are summing
1999 // and so iteration order isn't significant.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002000 for (SmallDenseMap<Instruction *, unsigned, 4>::iterator
2001 I = SinkCandidateUseCounts.begin(),
2002 E = SinkCandidateUseCounts.end();
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00002003 I != E; ++I)
2004 if (I->first->getNumUses() == I->second) {
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00002005 ++SpeculationCost;
2006 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00002007 return false;
2008 }
2009
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002010 // Check that the PHI nodes can be converted to selects.
2011 bool HaveRewritablePHIs = false;
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00002012 for (PHINode &PN : EndBB->phis()) {
2013 Value *OrigV = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
2014 Value *ThenV = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(ThenBB);
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002015
Rafael Espindolaa5e536a2013-06-04 14:11:59 +00002016 // FIXME: Try to remove some of the duplication with HoistThenElseCodeToIf.
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002017 // Skip PHIs which are trivial.
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00002018 if (ThenV == OrigV)
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002019 continue;
2020
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00002021 // Don't convert to selects if we could remove undefined behavior instead.
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00002022 if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(OrigV, &PN) ||
2023 passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(ThenV, &PN))
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00002024 return false;
2025
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002026 HaveRewritablePHIs = true;
Rafael Espindolaa5e536a2013-06-04 14:11:59 +00002027 ConstantExpr *OrigCE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(OrigV);
2028 ConstantExpr *ThenCE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(ThenV);
2029 if (!OrigCE && !ThenCE)
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00002030 continue; // Known safe and cheap.
2031
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002032 if ((ThenCE && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(ThenCE)) ||
2033 (OrigCE && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(OrigCE)))
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00002034 return false;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002035 unsigned OrigCost = OrigCE ? ComputeSpeculationCost(OrigCE, TTI) : 0;
2036 unsigned ThenCost = ThenCE ? ComputeSpeculationCost(ThenCE, TTI) : 0;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002037 unsigned MaxCost =
2038 2 * PHINodeFoldingThreshold * TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00002039 if (OrigCost + ThenCost > MaxCost)
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00002040 return false;
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002041
Chandler Carruth01bffaa2013-01-24 12:05:17 +00002042 // Account for the cost of an unfolded ConstantExpr which could end up
2043 // getting expanded into Instructions.
2044 // FIXME: This doesn't account for how many operations are combined in the
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00002045 // constant expression.
2046 ++SpeculationCost;
2047 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002048 return false;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00002049 }
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002050
2051 // If there are no PHIs to process, bail early. This helps ensure idempotence
2052 // as well.
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00002053 if (!HaveRewritablePHIs && !(HoistCondStores && SpeculatedStoreValue))
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002054 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002055
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002056 // If we get here, we can hoist the instruction and if-convert.
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00002057 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "SPECULATIVELY EXECUTING BB" << *ThenBB << "\n";);
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00002058
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00002059 // Insert a select of the value of the speculated store.
2060 if (SpeculatedStoreValue) {
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00002061 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(BI);
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00002062 Value *TrueV = SpeculatedStore->getValueOperand();
2063 Value *FalseV = SpeculatedStoreValue;
2064 if (Invert)
2065 std::swap(TrueV, FalseV);
Sanjay Patel796db352016-03-26 23:30:50 +00002066 Value *S = Builder.CreateSelect(
Craig Topper7c7fcab2017-10-31 19:03:51 +00002067 BrCond, TrueV, FalseV, "spec.store.select", BI);
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00002068 SpeculatedStore->setOperand(0, S);
Dehao Chenf4646272017-10-02 18:13:14 +00002069 SpeculatedStore->applyMergedLocation(BI->getDebugLoc(),
2070 SpeculatedStore->getDebugLoc());
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00002071 }
2072
Igor Laevsky7310c682015-11-18 14:50:18 +00002073 // Metadata can be dependent on the condition we are hoisting above.
2074 // Conservatively strip all metadata on the instruction.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002075 for (auto &I : *ThenBB)
Igor Laevsky7310c682015-11-18 14:50:18 +00002076 I.dropUnknownNonDebugMetadata();
2077
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00002078 // Hoist the instructions.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002079 BB->getInstList().splice(BI->getIterator(), ThenBB->getInstList(),
2080 ThenBB->begin(), std::prev(ThenBB->end()));
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +00002081
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002082 // Insert selects and rewrite the PHI operands.
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00002083 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(BI);
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00002084 for (PHINode &PN : EndBB->phis()) {
2085 unsigned OrigI = PN.getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
2086 unsigned ThenI = PN.getBasicBlockIndex(ThenBB);
2087 Value *OrigV = PN.getIncomingValue(OrigI);
2088 Value *ThenV = PN.getIncomingValue(ThenI);
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002089
2090 // Skip PHIs which are trivial.
2091 if (OrigV == ThenV)
2092 continue;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00002093
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002094 // Create a select whose true value is the speculatively executed value and
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002095 // false value is the preexisting value. Swap them if the branch
2096 // destinations were inverted.
2097 Value *TrueV = ThenV, *FalseV = OrigV;
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002098 if (Invert)
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002099 std::swap(TrueV, FalseV);
Sanjay Patelf11ab052016-04-15 15:32:12 +00002100 Value *V = Builder.CreateSelect(
Craig Topper7c7fcab2017-10-31 19:03:51 +00002101 BrCond, TrueV, FalseV, "spec.select", BI);
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00002102 PN.setIncomingValue(OrigI, V);
2103 PN.setIncomingValue(ThenI, V);
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00002104 }
2105
Bjorn Petterssone73b85d12017-11-02 11:55:14 +00002106 // Remove speculated dbg intrinsics.
2107 // FIXME: Is it possible to do this in a more elegant way? Moving/merging the
2108 // dbg value for the different flows and inserting it after the select.
2109 for (Instruction *I : SpeculatedDbgIntrinsics)
2110 I->eraseFromParent();
2111
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +00002112 ++NumSpeculations;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00002113 return true;
2114}
2115
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002116/// Return true if we can thread a branch across this block.
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00002117static bool BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BasicBlock *BB) {
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00002118 unsigned Size = 0;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002119
Florian Hahn3df88442018-04-30 20:10:53 +00002120 for (Instruction &I : BB->instructionsWithoutDebug()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002121 if (Size > 10)
2122 return false; // Don't clone large BB's.
Dale Johannesened6f5a82009-03-12 23:18:09 +00002123 ++Size;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002124
Dale Johannesened6f5a82009-03-12 23:18:09 +00002125 // We can only support instructions that do not define values that are
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00002126 // live outside of the current basic block.
Florian Hahn3df88442018-04-30 20:10:53 +00002127 for (User *U : I.users()) {
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00002128 Instruction *UI = cast<Instruction>(U);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002129 if (UI->getParent() != BB || isa<PHINode>(UI))
2130 return false;
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00002131 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002132
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00002133 // Looks ok, continue checking.
2134 }
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00002135
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00002136 return true;
2137}
2138
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002139/// If we have a conditional branch on a PHI node value that is defined in the
2140/// same block as the branch and if any PHI entries are constants, thread edges
2141/// corresponding to that entry to be branches to their ultimate destination.
Peter Collingbourne0609acc2017-02-15 03:01:11 +00002142static bool FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BranchInst *BI, const DataLayout &DL,
2143 AssumptionCache *AC) {
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002144 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
2145 PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BI->getCondition());
Chris Lattner049cb442005-09-19 23:57:04 +00002146 // NOTE: we currently cannot transform this case if the PHI node is used
2147 // outside of the block.
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00002148 if (!PN || PN->getParent() != BB || !PN->hasOneUse())
2149 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002150
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002151 // Degenerate case of a single entry PHI.
2152 if (PN->getNumIncomingValues() == 1) {
Chris Lattnerdc3f6f22008-12-03 19:44:02 +00002153 FoldSingleEntryPHINodes(PN->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002154 return true;
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002155 }
2156
2157 // Now we know that this block has multiple preds and two succs.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002158 if (!BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BB))
2159 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002160
Justin Lebardb639492016-02-12 21:01:36 +00002161 // Can't fold blocks that contain noduplicate or convergent calls.
David Majnemer0a16c222016-08-11 21:15:00 +00002162 if (any_of(*BB, [](const Instruction &I) {
Justin Lebardb639492016-02-12 21:01:36 +00002163 const CallInst *CI = dyn_cast<CallInst>(&I);
2164 return CI && (CI->cannotDuplicate() || CI->isConvergent());
2165 }))
2166 return false;
Tom Stellarde1631dd2013-10-21 20:07:30 +00002167
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002168 // Okay, this is a simple enough basic block. See if any phi values are
2169 // constants.
Zhou Sheng75b871f2007-01-11 12:24:14 +00002170 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PN->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i) {
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002171 ConstantInt *CB = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(PN->getIncomingValue(i));
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002172 if (!CB || !CB->getType()->isIntegerTy(1))
2173 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002174
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002175 // Okay, we now know that all edges from PredBB should be revectored to
2176 // branch to RealDest.
2177 BasicBlock *PredBB = PN->getIncomingBlock(i);
2178 BasicBlock *RealDest = BI->getSuccessor(!CB->getZExtValue());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002179
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002180 if (RealDest == BB)
2181 continue; // Skip self loops.
Bill Wendling4f163df2011-06-04 09:42:04 +00002182 // Skip if the predecessor's terminator is an indirect branch.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002183 if (isa<IndirectBrInst>(PredBB->getTerminator()))
2184 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002185
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002186 // The dest block might have PHI nodes, other predecessors and other
2187 // difficult cases. Instead of being smart about this, just insert a new
2188 // block that jumps to the destination block, effectively splitting
2189 // the edge we are about to create.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002190 BasicBlock *EdgeBB =
2191 BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), RealDest->getName() + ".critedge",
2192 RealDest->getParent(), RealDest);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002193 BranchInst::Create(RealDest, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002194
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00002195 // Update PHI nodes.
2196 AddPredecessorToBlock(RealDest, EdgeBB, BB);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002197
2198 // BB may have instructions that are being threaded over. Clone these
2199 // instructions into EdgeBB. We know that there will be no uses of the
2200 // cloned instructions outside of EdgeBB.
2201 BasicBlock::iterator InsertPt = EdgeBB->begin();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002202 DenseMap<Value *, Value *> TranslateMap; // Track translated values.
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002203 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin(); &*BBI != BI; ++BBI) {
2204 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)) {
2205 TranslateMap[PN] = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(PredBB);
2206 continue;
2207 }
2208 // Clone the instruction.
2209 Instruction *N = BBI->clone();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002210 if (BBI->hasName())
2211 N->setName(BBI->getName() + ".c");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002212
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002213 // Update operands due to translation.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002214 for (User::op_iterator i = N->op_begin(), e = N->op_end(); i != e; ++i) {
2215 DenseMap<Value *, Value *>::iterator PI = TranslateMap.find(*i);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002216 if (PI != TranslateMap.end())
2217 *i = PI->second;
2218 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002219
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002220 // Check for trivial simplification.
Daniel Berlin4d0fe642017-04-28 19:55:38 +00002221 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(N, {DL, nullptr, nullptr, AC})) {
David Majnemerb8da3a22016-06-25 00:04:10 +00002222 if (!BBI->use_empty())
2223 TranslateMap[&*BBI] = V;
2224 if (!N->mayHaveSideEffects()) {
Reid Kleckner96ab8722017-05-18 17:24:10 +00002225 N->deleteValue(); // Instruction folded away, don't need actual inst
David Majnemerb8da3a22016-06-25 00:04:10 +00002226 N = nullptr;
2227 }
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002228 } else {
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002229 if (!BBI->use_empty())
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002230 TranslateMap[&*BBI] = N;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002231 }
David Majnemerb8da3a22016-06-25 00:04:10 +00002232 // Insert the new instruction into its new home.
2233 if (N)
2234 EdgeBB->getInstList().insert(InsertPt, N);
Peter Collingbourne0609acc2017-02-15 03:01:11 +00002235
2236 // Register the new instruction with the assumption cache if necessary.
2237 if (auto *II = dyn_cast_or_null<IntrinsicInst>(N))
2238 if (II->getIntrinsicID() == Intrinsic::assume)
2239 AC->registerAssumption(II);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002240 }
2241
2242 // Loop over all of the edges from PredBB to BB, changing them to branch
2243 // to EdgeBB instead.
2244 TerminatorInst *PredBBTI = PredBB->getTerminator();
2245 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredBBTI->getNumSuccessors(); i != e; ++i)
2246 if (PredBBTI->getSuccessor(i) == BB) {
2247 BB->removePredecessor(PredBB);
2248 PredBBTI->setSuccessor(i, EdgeBB);
2249 }
Bill Wendling4f163df2011-06-04 09:42:04 +00002250
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002251 // Recurse, simplifying any other constants.
Justin Bogner6f1740d2018-08-20 06:37:11 +00002252 return FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BI, DL, AC) || true;
Zhou Sheng75b871f2007-01-11 12:24:14 +00002253 }
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002254
2255 return false;
2256}
2257
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002258/// Given a BB that starts with the specified two-entry PHI node,
2259/// see if we can eliminate it.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002260static bool FoldTwoEntryPHINode(PHINode *PN, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
2261 const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002262 // Ok, this is a two entry PHI node. Check to see if this is a simple "if
2263 // statement", which has a very simple dominance structure. Basically, we
2264 // are trying to find the condition that is being branched on, which
2265 // subsequently causes this merge to happen. We really want control
2266 // dependence information for this check, but simplifycfg can't keep it up
2267 // to date, and this catches most of the cases we care about anyway.
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002268 BasicBlock *BB = PN->getParent();
Matt Morehouse236cdaf2018-03-22 17:07:51 +00002269 const Function *Fn = BB->getParent();
2270 if (Fn && Fn->hasFnAttribute(Attribute::OptForFuzzing))
2271 return false;
2272
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002273 BasicBlock *IfTrue, *IfFalse;
2274 Value *IfCond = GetIfCondition(BB, IfTrue, IfFalse);
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00002275 if (!IfCond ||
2276 // Don't bother if the branch will be constant folded trivially.
2277 isa<ConstantInt>(IfCond))
2278 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002279
Chris Lattner95adf8f12006-11-18 19:19:36 +00002280 // Okay, we found that we can merge this two-entry phi node into a select.
2281 // Doing so would require us to fold *all* two entry phi nodes in this block.
2282 // At some point this becomes non-profitable (particularly if the target
2283 // doesn't support cmov's). Only do this transformation if there are two or
2284 // fewer PHI nodes in this block.
2285 unsigned NumPhis = 0;
2286 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(I); ++NumPhis, ++I)
2287 if (NumPhis > 2)
2288 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002289
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002290 // Loop over the PHI's seeing if we can promote them all to select
2291 // instructions. While we are at it, keep track of the instructions
2292 // that need to be moved to the dominating block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002293 SmallPtrSet<Instruction *, 4> AggressiveInsts;
Peter Collingbourne616044a2011-04-29 18:47:38 +00002294 unsigned MaxCostVal0 = PHINodeFoldingThreshold,
2295 MaxCostVal1 = PHINodeFoldingThreshold;
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00002296 MaxCostVal0 *= TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
2297 MaxCostVal1 *= TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002298
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00002299 for (BasicBlock::iterator II = BB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(II);) {
2300 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(II++);
Daniel Berlin4d0fe642017-04-28 19:55:38 +00002301 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(PN, {DL, PN})) {
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00002302 PN->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00002303 PN->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00002304 continue;
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002305 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002306
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +00002307 if (!DominatesMergePoint(PN->getIncomingValue(0), BB, &AggressiveInsts,
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002308 MaxCostVal0, TTI) ||
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +00002309 !DominatesMergePoint(PN->getIncomingValue(1), BB, &AggressiveInsts,
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002310 MaxCostVal1, TTI))
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00002311 return false;
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002312 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002313
Sylvestre Ledru35521e22012-07-23 08:51:15 +00002314 // If we folded the first phi, PN dangles at this point. Refresh it. If
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002315 // we ran out of PHIs then we simplified them all.
2316 PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002317 if (!PN)
2318 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002319
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00002320 // Don't fold i1 branches on PHIs which contain binary operators. These can
2321 // often be turned into switches and other things.
2322 if (PN->getType()->isIntegerTy(1) &&
2323 (isa<BinaryOperator>(PN->getIncomingValue(0)) ||
2324 isa<BinaryOperator>(PN->getIncomingValue(1)) ||
2325 isa<BinaryOperator>(IfCond)))
2326 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002327
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00002328 // If all PHI nodes are promotable, check to make sure that all instructions
2329 // in the predecessor blocks can be promoted as well. If not, we won't be able
2330 // to get rid of the control flow, so it's not worth promoting to select
2331 // instructions.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002332 BasicBlock *DomBlock = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002333 BasicBlock *IfBlock1 = PN->getIncomingBlock(0);
2334 BasicBlock *IfBlock2 = PN->getIncomingBlock(1);
2335 if (cast<BranchInst>(IfBlock1->getTerminator())->isConditional()) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002336 IfBlock1 = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002337 } else {
2338 DomBlock = *pred_begin(IfBlock1);
Chandler Carruth9ae926b2018-08-26 09:51:22 +00002339 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = IfBlock1->begin(); !I->isTerminator(); ++I)
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002340 if (!AggressiveInsts.count(&*I) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002341 // This is not an aggressive instruction that we can promote.
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00002342 // Because of this, we won't be able to get rid of the control flow, so
2343 // the xform is not worth it.
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002344 return false;
2345 }
2346 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002347
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002348 if (cast<BranchInst>(IfBlock2->getTerminator())->isConditional()) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002349 IfBlock2 = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002350 } else {
2351 DomBlock = *pred_begin(IfBlock2);
Chandler Carruth9ae926b2018-08-26 09:51:22 +00002352 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = IfBlock2->begin(); !I->isTerminator(); ++I)
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002353 if (!AggressiveInsts.count(&*I) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002354 // This is not an aggressive instruction that we can promote.
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00002355 // Because of this, we won't be able to get rid of the control flow, so
2356 // the xform is not worth it.
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002357 return false;
2358 }
2359 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002360
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00002361 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOUND IF CONDITION! " << *IfCond
2362 << " T: " << IfTrue->getName()
2363 << " F: " << IfFalse->getName() << "\n");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002364
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002365 // If we can still promote the PHI nodes after this gauntlet of tests,
2366 // do all of the PHI's now.
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00002367 Instruction *InsertPt = DomBlock->getTerminator();
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00002368 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(InsertPt);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002369
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002370 // Move all 'aggressive' instructions, which are defined in the
2371 // conditional parts of the if's up to the dominating block.
David Majnemere8fd5f92016-08-29 17:14:08 +00002372 if (IfBlock1) {
Carlos Alberto Encisoba4e4372018-09-19 08:16:56 +00002373 for (auto &I : *IfBlock1) {
David Majnemere8fd5f92016-08-29 17:14:08 +00002374 I.dropUnknownNonDebugMetadata();
Carlos Alberto Encisoba4e4372018-09-19 08:16:56 +00002375 dropDebugUsers(I);
2376 }
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002377 DomBlock->getInstList().splice(InsertPt->getIterator(),
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002378 IfBlock1->getInstList(), IfBlock1->begin(),
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002379 IfBlock1->getTerminator()->getIterator());
David Majnemere8fd5f92016-08-29 17:14:08 +00002380 }
2381 if (IfBlock2) {
Carlos Alberto Encisoba4e4372018-09-19 08:16:56 +00002382 for (auto &I : *IfBlock2) {
David Majnemere8fd5f92016-08-29 17:14:08 +00002383 I.dropUnknownNonDebugMetadata();
Carlos Alberto Encisoba4e4372018-09-19 08:16:56 +00002384 dropDebugUsers(I);
2385 }
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002386 DomBlock->getInstList().splice(InsertPt->getIterator(),
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002387 IfBlock2->getInstList(), IfBlock2->begin(),
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002388 IfBlock2->getTerminator()->getIterator());
David Majnemere8fd5f92016-08-29 17:14:08 +00002389 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002390
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002391 while (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin())) {
2392 // Change the PHI node into a select instruction.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002393 Value *TrueVal = PN->getIncomingValue(PN->getIncomingBlock(0) == IfFalse);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002394 Value *FalseVal = PN->getIncomingValue(PN->getIncomingBlock(0) == IfTrue);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002395
Sanjay Patel9e23fed2016-03-17 15:30:52 +00002396 Value *Sel = Builder.CreateSelect(IfCond, TrueVal, FalseVal, "", InsertPt);
2397 PN->replaceAllUsesWith(Sel);
2398 Sel->takeName(PN);
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00002399 PN->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002400 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002401
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00002402 // At this point, IfBlock1 and IfBlock2 are both empty, so our if statement
2403 // has been flattened. Change DomBlock to jump directly to our new block to
2404 // avoid other simplifycfg's kicking in on the diamond.
2405 TerminatorInst *OldTI = DomBlock->getTerminator();
Devang Patel5c810ce2011-05-18 18:16:44 +00002406 Builder.SetInsertPoint(OldTI);
2407 Builder.CreateBr(BB);
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00002408 OldTI->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002409 return true;
2410}
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002411
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002412/// If we found a conditional branch that goes to two returning blocks,
2413/// try to merge them together into one return,
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002414/// introducing a select if the return values disagree.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002415static bool SimplifyCondBranchToTwoReturns(BranchInst *BI,
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002416 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002417 assert(BI->isConditional() && "Must be a conditional branch");
2418 BasicBlock *TrueSucc = BI->getSuccessor(0);
2419 BasicBlock *FalseSucc = BI->getSuccessor(1);
2420 ReturnInst *TrueRet = cast<ReturnInst>(TrueSucc->getTerminator());
2421 ReturnInst *FalseRet = cast<ReturnInst>(FalseSucc->getTerminator());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002422
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002423 // Check to ensure both blocks are empty (just a return) or optionally empty
2424 // with PHI nodes. If there are other instructions, merging would cause extra
2425 // computation on one path or the other.
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002426 if (!TrueSucc->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator())
Devang Patel086b2122009-02-05 00:30:42 +00002427 return false;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002428 if (!FalseSucc->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator())
Devang Patel086b2122009-02-05 00:30:42 +00002429 return false;
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002430
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002431 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BI);
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002432 // Okay, we found a branch that is going to two return nodes. If
2433 // there is no return value for this function, just change the
2434 // branch into a return.
2435 if (FalseRet->getNumOperands() == 0) {
2436 TrueSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
2437 FalseSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002438 Builder.CreateRetVoid();
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00002439 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002440 return true;
2441 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002442
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002443 // Otherwise, figure out what the true and false return values are
2444 // so we can insert a new select instruction.
2445 Value *TrueValue = TrueRet->getReturnValue();
2446 Value *FalseValue = FalseRet->getReturnValue();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002447
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002448 // Unwrap any PHI nodes in the return blocks.
2449 if (PHINode *TVPN = dyn_cast_or_null<PHINode>(TrueValue))
2450 if (TVPN->getParent() == TrueSucc)
2451 TrueValue = TVPN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BI->getParent());
2452 if (PHINode *FVPN = dyn_cast_or_null<PHINode>(FalseValue))
2453 if (FVPN->getParent() == FalseSucc)
2454 FalseValue = FVPN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002455
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002456 // In order for this transformation to be safe, we must be able to
2457 // unconditionally execute both operands to the return. This is
2458 // normally the case, but we could have a potentially-trapping
2459 // constant expression that prevents this transformation from being
2460 // safe.
2461 if (ConstantExpr *TCV = dyn_cast_or_null<ConstantExpr>(TrueValue))
2462 if (TCV->canTrap())
2463 return false;
2464 if (ConstantExpr *FCV = dyn_cast_or_null<ConstantExpr>(FalseValue))
2465 if (FCV->canTrap())
2466 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002467
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002468 // Okay, we collected all the mapped values and checked them for sanity, and
2469 // defined to really do this transformation. First, update the CFG.
2470 TrueSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
2471 FalseSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002472
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002473 // Insert select instructions where needed.
2474 Value *BrCond = BI->getCondition();
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002475 if (TrueValue) {
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002476 // Insert a select if the results differ.
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002477 if (TrueValue == FalseValue || isa<UndefValue>(FalseValue)) {
2478 } else if (isa<UndefValue>(TrueValue)) {
2479 TrueValue = FalseValue;
2480 } else {
Sanjay Patelfacf45a2016-04-27 23:14:12 +00002481 TrueValue =
2482 Builder.CreateSelect(BrCond, TrueValue, FalseValue, "retval", BI);
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002483 }
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002484 }
2485
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002486 Value *RI =
2487 !TrueValue ? Builder.CreateRetVoid() : Builder.CreateRet(TrueValue);
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002488
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002489 (void)RI;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002490
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00002491 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "\nCHANGING BRANCH TO TWO RETURNS INTO SELECT:"
2492 << "\n " << *BI << "NewRet = " << *RI << "TRUEBLOCK: "
2493 << *TrueSucc << "FALSEBLOCK: " << *FalseSucc);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002494
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00002495 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
2496
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002497 return true;
2498}
2499
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002500/// Return true if the given instruction is available
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002501/// in its predecessor block. If yes, the instruction will be removed.
David Stenberg0af67e52018-05-18 08:52:15 +00002502static bool tryCSEWithPredecessor(Instruction *Inst, BasicBlock *PB) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002503 if (!isa<BinaryOperator>(Inst) && !isa<CmpInst>(Inst))
2504 return false;
Benjamin Kramer135f7352016-06-26 12:28:59 +00002505 for (Instruction &I : *PB) {
2506 Instruction *PBI = &I;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002507 // Check whether Inst and PBI generate the same value.
2508 if (Inst->isIdenticalTo(PBI)) {
2509 Inst->replaceAllUsesWith(PBI);
2510 Inst->eraseFromParent();
2511 return true;
2512 }
2513 }
2514 return false;
2515}
Nick Lewycky3c3feaf2012-01-25 09:43:14 +00002516
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002517/// Return true if either PBI or BI has branch weight available, and store
2518/// the weights in {Pred|Succ}{True|False}Weight. If one of PBI and BI does
2519/// not have branch weight, use 1:1 as its weight.
2520static bool extractPredSuccWeights(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *BI,
2521 uint64_t &PredTrueWeight,
2522 uint64_t &PredFalseWeight,
2523 uint64_t &SuccTrueWeight,
2524 uint64_t &SuccFalseWeight) {
2525 bool PredHasWeights =
2526 PBI->extractProfMetadata(PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight);
2527 bool SuccHasWeights =
2528 BI->extractProfMetadata(SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight);
2529 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
2530 if (!PredHasWeights)
2531 PredTrueWeight = PredFalseWeight = 1;
2532 if (!SuccHasWeights)
2533 SuccTrueWeight = SuccFalseWeight = 1;
2534 return true;
2535 } else {
2536 return false;
2537 }
2538}
2539
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002540/// If this basic block is simple enough, and if a predecessor branches to us
2541/// and one of our successors, fold the block into the predecessor and use
2542/// logical operations to pick the right destination.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002543bool llvm::FoldBranchToCommonDest(BranchInst *BI, unsigned BonusInstThreshold) {
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00002544 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002545
Philip Reames6bd16b52018-08-30 00:03:02 +00002546 const unsigned PredCount = pred_size(BB);
2547
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002548 Instruction *Cond = nullptr;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002549 if (BI->isConditional())
2550 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
2551 else {
2552 // For unconditional branch, check for a simple CFG pattern, where
2553 // BB has a single predecessor and BB's successor is also its predecessor's
Craig Topper36af40c2017-08-02 02:34:16 +00002554 // successor. If such pattern exists, check for CSE between BB and its
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002555 // predecessor.
2556 if (BasicBlock *PB = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
2557 if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PB->getTerminator()))
2558 if (PBI->isConditional() &&
2559 (BI->getSuccessor(0) == PBI->getSuccessor(0) ||
2560 BI->getSuccessor(0) == PBI->getSuccessor(1))) {
David Stenberg0af67e52018-05-18 08:52:15 +00002561 for (auto I = BB->instructionsWithoutDebug().begin(),
2562 E = BB->instructionsWithoutDebug().end();
2563 I != E;) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002564 Instruction *Curr = &*I++;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002565 if (isa<CmpInst>(Curr)) {
2566 Cond = Curr;
2567 break;
2568 }
2569 // Quit if we can't remove this instruction.
David Stenberg0af67e52018-05-18 08:52:15 +00002570 if (!tryCSEWithPredecessor(Curr, PB))
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002571 return false;
2572 }
2573 }
2574
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002575 if (!Cond)
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002576 return false;
2577 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002578
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002579 if (!Cond || (!isa<CmpInst>(Cond) && !isa<BinaryOperator>(Cond)) ||
2580 Cond->getParent() != BB || !Cond->hasOneUse())
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00002581 return false;
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002582
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002583 // Make sure the instruction after the condition is the cond branch.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002584 BasicBlock::iterator CondIt = ++Cond->getIterator();
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002585
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00002586 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002587 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(CondIt))
2588 ++CondIt;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002589
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002590 if (&*CondIt != BI)
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002591 return false;
Chris Lattnerea9f1d32009-01-19 23:03:13 +00002592
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002593 // Only allow this transformation if computing the condition doesn't involve
2594 // too many instructions and these involved instructions can be executed
2595 // unconditionally. We denote all involved instructions except the condition
2596 // as "bonus instructions", and only allow this transformation when the
Philip Reames6bd16b52018-08-30 00:03:02 +00002597 // number of the bonus instructions we'll need to create when cloning into
2598 // each predecessor does not exceed a certain threshold.
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002599 unsigned NumBonusInsts = 0;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithe9bc5792016-02-21 20:39:50 +00002600 for (auto I = BB->begin(); Cond != &*I; ++I) {
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002601 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
2602 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
2603 continue;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002604 if (!I->hasOneUse() || !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(&*I))
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002605 return false;
2606 // I has only one use and can be executed unconditionally.
2607 Instruction *User = dyn_cast<Instruction>(I->user_back());
2608 if (User == nullptr || User->getParent() != BB)
2609 return false;
2610 // I is used in the same BB. Since BI uses Cond and doesn't have more slots
2611 // to use any other instruction, User must be an instruction between next(I)
2612 // and Cond.
Philip Reames6bd16b52018-08-30 00:03:02 +00002613
2614 // Account for the cost of duplicating this instruction into each
2615 // predecessor.
2616 NumBonusInsts += PredCount;
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002617 // Early exits once we reach the limit.
2618 if (NumBonusInsts > BonusInstThreshold)
2619 return false;
2620 }
2621
Chris Lattnerea9f1d32009-01-19 23:03:13 +00002622 // Cond is known to be a compare or binary operator. Check to make sure that
2623 // neither operand is a potentially-trapping constant expression.
2624 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(Cond->getOperand(0)))
2625 if (CE->canTrap())
2626 return false;
2627 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(Cond->getOperand(1)))
2628 if (CE->canTrap())
2629 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002630
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002631 // Finally, don't infinitely unroll conditional loops.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002632 BasicBlock *TrueDest = BI->getSuccessor(0);
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002633 BasicBlock *FalseDest = (BI->isConditional()) ? BI->getSuccessor(1) : nullptr;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002634 if (TrueDest == BB || FalseDest == BB)
2635 return false;
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002636
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00002637 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI) {
2638 BasicBlock *PredBlock = *PI;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002639 BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PredBlock->getTerminator());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002640
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00002641 // Check that we have two conditional branches. If there is a PHI node in
2642 // the common successor, verify that the same value flows in from both
2643 // blocks.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002644 SmallVector<PHINode *, 4> PHIs;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002645 if (!PBI || PBI->isUnconditional() ||
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002646 (BI->isConditional() && !SafeToMergeTerminators(BI, PBI)) ||
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002647 (!BI->isConditional() &&
2648 !isProfitableToFoldUnconditional(BI, PBI, Cond, PHIs)))
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002649 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002650
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002651 // Determine if the two branches share a common destination.
Axel Naumann4a127062012-09-17 14:20:57 +00002652 Instruction::BinaryOps Opc = Instruction::BinaryOpsEnd;
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002653 bool InvertPredCond = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002654
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002655 if (BI->isConditional()) {
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002656 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == TrueDest) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002657 Opc = Instruction::Or;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002658 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == FalseDest) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002659 Opc = Instruction::And;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002660 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == FalseDest) {
2661 Opc = Instruction::And;
2662 InvertPredCond = true;
2663 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == TrueDest) {
2664 Opc = Instruction::Or;
2665 InvertPredCond = true;
2666 } else {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002667 continue;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002668 }
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002669 } else {
2670 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) != TrueDest && PBI->getSuccessor(1) != TrueDest)
2671 continue;
2672 }
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002673
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00002674 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING BRANCH TO COMMON DEST:\n" << *PBI << *BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002675 IRBuilder<> Builder(PBI);
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002676
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002677 // If we need to invert the condition in the pred block to match, do so now.
2678 if (InvertPredCond) {
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002679 Value *NewCond = PBI->getCondition();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002680
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002681 if (NewCond->hasOneUse() && isa<CmpInst>(NewCond)) {
2682 CmpInst *CI = cast<CmpInst>(NewCond);
2683 CI->setPredicate(CI->getInversePredicate());
2684 } else {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002685 NewCond =
2686 Builder.CreateNot(NewCond, PBI->getCondition()->getName() + ".not");
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002687 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002688
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002689 PBI->setCondition(NewCond);
Nick Lewycky8d302df2011-12-26 20:54:14 +00002690 PBI->swapSuccessors();
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002691 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002692
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002693 // If we have bonus instructions, clone them into the predecessor block.
Sanjay Pateladb110c2015-06-24 20:07:50 +00002694 // Note that there may be multiple predecessor blocks, so we cannot move
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002695 // bonus instructions to a predecessor block.
2696 ValueToValueMapTy VMap; // maps original values to cloned values
2697 // We already make sure Cond is the last instruction before BI. Therefore,
Sanjay Pateladb110c2015-06-24 20:07:50 +00002698 // all instructions before Cond other than DbgInfoIntrinsic are bonus
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002699 // instructions.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithe9bc5792016-02-21 20:39:50 +00002700 for (auto BonusInst = BB->begin(); Cond != &*BonusInst; ++BonusInst) {
Martin Storsjo22dcddf2018-08-30 08:06:50 +00002701 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BonusInst))
2702 continue;
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002703 Instruction *NewBonusInst = BonusInst->clone();
2704 RemapInstruction(NewBonusInst, VMap,
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithda68cbc2016-04-07 00:26:43 +00002705 RF_NoModuleLevelChanges | RF_IgnoreMissingLocals);
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002706 VMap[&*BonusInst] = NewBonusInst;
Rafael Espindolaab73c492014-01-28 16:56:46 +00002707
2708 // If we moved a load, we cannot any longer claim any knowledge about
2709 // its potential value. The previous information might have been valid
2710 // only given the branch precondition.
2711 // For an analogous reason, we must also drop all the metadata whose
2712 // semantics we don't understand.
Adrian Prantlcbdfdb72015-08-20 22:00:30 +00002713 NewBonusInst->dropUnknownNonDebugMetadata();
Rafael Espindolaab73c492014-01-28 16:56:46 +00002714
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002715 PredBlock->getInstList().insert(PBI->getIterator(), NewBonusInst);
2716 NewBonusInst->takeName(&*BonusInst);
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002717 BonusInst->setName(BonusInst->getName() + ".old");
Owen Anderson2cfe9132010-07-14 19:52:16 +00002718 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002719
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002720 // Clone Cond into the predecessor basic block, and or/and the
2721 // two conditions together.
Philip Reamesbed55612018-08-30 00:12:29 +00002722 Instruction *CondInPred = Cond->clone();
2723 RemapInstruction(CondInPred, VMap,
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithda68cbc2016-04-07 00:26:43 +00002724 RF_NoModuleLevelChanges | RF_IgnoreMissingLocals);
Philip Reamesbed55612018-08-30 00:12:29 +00002725 PredBlock->getInstList().insert(PBI->getIterator(), CondInPred);
2726 CondInPred->takeName(Cond);
2727 Cond->setName(CondInPred->getName() + ".old");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002728
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002729 if (BI->isConditional()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002730 Instruction *NewCond = cast<Instruction>(
Philip Reamesbed55612018-08-30 00:12:29 +00002731 Builder.CreateBinOp(Opc, PBI->getCondition(), CondInPred, "or.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002732 PBI->setCondition(NewCond);
2733
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002734 uint64_t PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight, SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight;
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002735 bool HasWeights =
2736 extractPredSuccWeights(PBI, BI, PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight,
2737 SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight);
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002738 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> NewWeights;
2739
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002740 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002741 if (HasWeights) {
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002742 // PBI: br i1 %x, BB, FalseDest
2743 // BI: br i1 %y, TrueDest, FalseDest
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002744 // TrueWeight is TrueWeight for PBI * TrueWeight for BI.
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002745 NewWeights.push_back(PredTrueWeight * SuccTrueWeight);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002746 // FalseWeight is FalseWeight for PBI * TotalWeight for BI +
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002747 // TrueWeight for PBI * FalseWeight for BI.
2748 // We assume that total weights of a BranchInst can fit into 32 bits.
2749 // Therefore, we will not have overflow using 64-bit arithmetic.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002750 NewWeights.push_back(PredFalseWeight *
2751 (SuccFalseWeight + SuccTrueWeight) +
2752 PredTrueWeight * SuccFalseWeight);
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002753 }
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002754 AddPredecessorToBlock(TrueDest, PredBlock, BB);
2755 PBI->setSuccessor(0, TrueDest);
2756 }
2757 if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BB) {
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002758 if (HasWeights) {
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002759 // PBI: br i1 %x, TrueDest, BB
2760 // BI: br i1 %y, TrueDest, FalseDest
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002761 // TrueWeight is TrueWeight for PBI * TotalWeight for BI +
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002762 // FalseWeight for PBI * TrueWeight for BI.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002763 NewWeights.push_back(PredTrueWeight *
2764 (SuccFalseWeight + SuccTrueWeight) +
2765 PredFalseWeight * SuccTrueWeight);
2766 // FalseWeight is FalseWeight for PBI * FalseWeight for BI.
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002767 NewWeights.push_back(PredFalseWeight * SuccFalseWeight);
2768 }
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002769 AddPredecessorToBlock(FalseDest, PredBlock, BB);
2770 PBI->setSuccessor(1, FalseDest);
2771 }
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002772 if (NewWeights.size() == 2) {
2773 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
2774 FitWeights(NewWeights);
2775
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002776 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(NewWeights.begin(),
2777 NewWeights.end());
Easwaran Raman0a0913d2017-11-09 22:52:20 +00002778 setBranchWeights(PBI, MDWeights[0], MDWeights[1]);
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002779 } else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002780 PBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, nullptr);
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002781 } else {
2782 // Update PHI nodes in the common successors.
2783 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PHIs.size(); i != e; ++i) {
Nick Lewycky0a045bb2012-06-24 10:15:42 +00002784 ConstantInt *PBI_C = cast<ConstantInt>(
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002785 PHIs[i]->getIncomingValueForBlock(PBI->getParent()));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002786 assert(PBI_C->getType()->isIntegerTy(1));
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002787 Instruction *MergedCond = nullptr;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002788 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == TrueDest) {
2789 // Create (PBI_Cond and PBI_C) or (!PBI_Cond and BI_Value)
2790 // PBI_C is true: PBI_Cond or (!PBI_Cond and BI_Value)
2791 // is false: !PBI_Cond and BI_Value
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002792 Instruction *NotCond = cast<Instruction>(
2793 Builder.CreateNot(PBI->getCondition(), "not.cond"));
2794 MergedCond = cast<Instruction>(
Philip Reamesbed55612018-08-30 00:12:29 +00002795 Builder.CreateBinOp(Instruction::And, NotCond, CondInPred,
2796 "and.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002797 if (PBI_C->isOne())
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002798 MergedCond = cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(
2799 Instruction::Or, PBI->getCondition(), MergedCond, "or.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002800 } else {
2801 // Create (PBI_Cond and BI_Value) or (!PBI_Cond and PBI_C)
2802 // PBI_C is true: (PBI_Cond and BI_Value) or (!PBI_Cond)
2803 // is false: PBI_Cond and BI_Value
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002804 MergedCond = cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(
Philip Reamesbed55612018-08-30 00:12:29 +00002805 Instruction::And, PBI->getCondition(), CondInPred, "and.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002806 if (PBI_C->isOne()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002807 Instruction *NotCond = cast<Instruction>(
2808 Builder.CreateNot(PBI->getCondition(), "not.cond"));
2809 MergedCond = cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(
2810 Instruction::Or, NotCond, MergedCond, "or.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002811 }
2812 }
2813 // Update PHI Node.
2814 PHIs[i]->setIncomingValue(PHIs[i]->getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent()),
2815 MergedCond);
2816 }
2817 // Change PBI from Conditional to Unconditional.
2818 BranchInst *New_PBI = BranchInst::Create(TrueDest, PBI);
2819 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(PBI);
2820 PBI = New_PBI;
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002821 }
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002822
Michael Kuperstein3ca147e2016-12-16 21:23:59 +00002823 // If BI was a loop latch, it may have had associated loop metadata.
2824 // We need to copy it to the new latch, that is, PBI.
2825 if (MDNode *LoopMD = BI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_loop))
2826 PBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_loop, LoopMD);
2827
Nick Lewyckyc554a9b2011-12-27 04:31:52 +00002828 // TODO: If BB is reachable from all paths through PredBlock, then we
2829 // could replace PBI's branch probabilities with BI's.
Martin Storsjo22dcddf2018-08-30 08:06:50 +00002830
2831 // Copy any debug value intrinsics into the end of PredBlock.
2832 for (Instruction &I : *BB)
2833 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
2834 I.clone()->insertBefore(PBI);
2835
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00002836 return true;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002837 }
2838 return false;
2839}
2840
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002841// If there is only one store in BB1 and BB2, return it, otherwise return
2842// nullptr.
2843static StoreInst *findUniqueStoreInBlocks(BasicBlock *BB1, BasicBlock *BB2) {
2844 StoreInst *S = nullptr;
2845 for (auto *BB : {BB1, BB2}) {
2846 if (!BB)
2847 continue;
2848 for (auto &I : *BB)
2849 if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I)) {
2850 if (S)
2851 // Multiple stores seen.
2852 return nullptr;
2853 else
2854 S = SI;
2855 }
2856 }
2857 return S;
2858}
2859
2860static Value *ensureValueAvailableInSuccessor(Value *V, BasicBlock *BB,
2861 Value *AlternativeV = nullptr) {
2862 // PHI is going to be a PHI node that allows the value V that is defined in
2863 // BB to be referenced in BB's only successor.
2864 //
2865 // If AlternativeV is nullptr, the only value we care about in PHI is V. It
2866 // doesn't matter to us what the other operand is (it'll never get used). We
2867 // could just create a new PHI with an undef incoming value, but that could
2868 // increase register pressure if EarlyCSE/InstCombine can't fold it with some
2869 // other PHI. So here we directly look for some PHI in BB's successor with V
2870 // as an incoming operand. If we find one, we use it, else we create a new
2871 // one.
2872 //
2873 // If AlternativeV is not nullptr, we care about both incoming values in PHI.
2874 // PHI must be exactly: phi <ty> [ %BB, %V ], [ %OtherBB, %AlternativeV]
2875 // where OtherBB is the single other predecessor of BB's only successor.
2876 PHINode *PHI = nullptr;
2877 BasicBlock *Succ = BB->getSingleSuccessor();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002878
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002879 for (auto I = Succ->begin(); isa<PHINode>(I); ++I)
2880 if (cast<PHINode>(I)->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB) == V) {
2881 PHI = cast<PHINode>(I);
2882 if (!AlternativeV)
2883 break;
2884
Vedant Kumare0b5f862018-05-10 23:01:54 +00002885 assert(pred_size(Succ) == 2);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002886 auto PredI = pred_begin(Succ);
2887 BasicBlock *OtherPredBB = *PredI == BB ? *++PredI : *PredI;
2888 if (PHI->getIncomingValueForBlock(OtherPredBB) == AlternativeV)
2889 break;
2890 PHI = nullptr;
2891 }
2892 if (PHI)
2893 return PHI;
2894
James Molloy3d21dcf2015-12-16 14:12:44 +00002895 // If V is not an instruction defined in BB, just return it.
2896 if (!AlternativeV &&
2897 (!isa<Instruction>(V) || cast<Instruction>(V)->getParent() != BB))
2898 return V;
2899
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith83c4b682015-11-07 00:01:16 +00002900 PHI = PHINode::Create(V->getType(), 2, "simplifycfg.merge", &Succ->front());
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002901 PHI->addIncoming(V, BB);
2902 for (BasicBlock *PredBB : predecessors(Succ))
2903 if (PredBB != BB)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002904 PHI->addIncoming(
2905 AlternativeV ? AlternativeV : UndefValue::get(V->getType()), PredBB);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002906 return PHI;
2907}
2908
2909static bool mergeConditionalStoreToAddress(BasicBlock *PTB, BasicBlock *PFB,
2910 BasicBlock *QTB, BasicBlock *QFB,
2911 BasicBlock *PostBB, Value *Address,
Alexey Bataev978e2e42017-08-29 20:06:24 +00002912 bool InvertPCond, bool InvertQCond,
2913 const DataLayout &DL) {
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002914 auto IsaBitcastOfPointerType = [](const Instruction &I) {
2915 return Operator::getOpcode(&I) == Instruction::BitCast &&
2916 I.getType()->isPointerTy();
2917 };
2918
2919 // If we're not in aggressive mode, we only optimize if we have some
2920 // confidence that by optimizing we'll allow P and/or Q to be if-converted.
2921 auto IsWorthwhile = [&](BasicBlock *BB) {
2922 if (!BB)
2923 return true;
2924 // Heuristic: if the block can be if-converted/phi-folded and the
2925 // instructions inside are all cheap (arithmetic/GEPs), it's worthwhile to
2926 // thread this store.
James Molloy9e959ac2015-11-05 08:40:19 +00002927 unsigned N = 0;
Florian Hahn3df88442018-04-30 20:10:53 +00002928 for (auto &I : BB->instructionsWithoutDebug()) {
James Molloy9e959ac2015-11-05 08:40:19 +00002929 // Cheap instructions viable for folding.
2930 if (isa<BinaryOperator>(I) || isa<GetElementPtrInst>(I) ||
2931 isa<StoreInst>(I))
2932 ++N;
2933 // Free instructions.
Chandler Carruth9ae926b2018-08-26 09:51:22 +00002934 else if (I.isTerminator() || IsaBitcastOfPointerType(I))
James Molloy9e959ac2015-11-05 08:40:19 +00002935 continue;
2936 else
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002937 return false;
James Molloy9e959ac2015-11-05 08:40:19 +00002938 }
Craig Topper12463772017-11-03 21:08:13 +00002939 // The store we want to merge is counted in N, so add 1 to make sure
2940 // we're counting the instructions that would be left.
2941 return N <= (PHINodeFoldingThreshold + 1);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002942 };
2943
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002944 if (!MergeCondStoresAggressively &&
2945 (!IsWorthwhile(PTB) || !IsWorthwhile(PFB) || !IsWorthwhile(QTB) ||
2946 !IsWorthwhile(QFB)))
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002947 return false;
2948
2949 // For every pointer, there must be exactly two stores, one coming from
2950 // PTB or PFB, and the other from QTB or QFB. We don't support more than one
2951 // store (to any address) in PTB,PFB or QTB,QFB.
2952 // FIXME: We could relax this restriction with a bit more work and performance
2953 // testing.
2954 StoreInst *PStore = findUniqueStoreInBlocks(PTB, PFB);
2955 StoreInst *QStore = findUniqueStoreInBlocks(QTB, QFB);
2956 if (!PStore || !QStore)
2957 return false;
2958
2959 // Now check the stores are compatible.
2960 if (!QStore->isUnordered() || !PStore->isUnordered())
2961 return false;
2962
2963 // Check that sinking the store won't cause program behavior changes. Sinking
2964 // the store out of the Q blocks won't change any behavior as we're sinking
2965 // from a block to its unconditional successor. But we're moving a store from
2966 // the P blocks down through the middle block (QBI) and past both QFB and QTB.
2967 // So we need to check that there are no aliasing loads or stores in
2968 // QBI, QTB and QFB. We also need to check there are no conflicting memory
2969 // operations between PStore and the end of its parent block.
2970 //
2971 // The ideal way to do this is to query AliasAnalysis, but we don't
2972 // preserve AA currently so that is dangerous. Be super safe and just
2973 // check there are no other memory operations at all.
2974 for (auto &I : *QFB->getSinglePredecessor())
2975 if (I.mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2976 return false;
2977 for (auto &I : *QFB)
2978 if (&I != QStore && I.mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2979 return false;
2980 if (QTB)
2981 for (auto &I : *QTB)
2982 if (&I != QStore && I.mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2983 return false;
2984 for (auto I = BasicBlock::iterator(PStore), E = PStore->getParent()->end();
2985 I != E; ++I)
2986 if (&*I != PStore && I->mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2987 return false;
2988
Craig Topper7d3aba62018-04-04 03:47:17 +00002989 // If PostBB has more than two predecessors, we need to split it so we can
2990 // sink the store.
2991 if (std::next(pred_begin(PostBB), 2) != pred_end(PostBB)) {
2992 // We know that QFB's only successor is PostBB. And QFB has a single
2993 // predecessor. If QTB exists, then its only successor is also PostBB.
2994 // If QTB does not exist, then QFB's only predecessor has a conditional
2995 // branch to QFB and PostBB.
2996 BasicBlock *TruePred = QTB ? QTB : QFB->getSinglePredecessor();
2997 BasicBlock *NewBB = SplitBlockPredecessors(PostBB, { QFB, TruePred},
2998 "condstore.split");
2999 if (!NewBB)
3000 return false;
3001 PostBB = NewBB;
3002 }
3003
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003004 // OK, we're going to sink the stores to PostBB. The store has to be
3005 // conditional though, so first create the predicate.
3006 Value *PCond = cast<BranchInst>(PFB->getSinglePredecessor()->getTerminator())
3007 ->getCondition();
3008 Value *QCond = cast<BranchInst>(QFB->getSinglePredecessor()->getTerminator())
3009 ->getCondition();
3010
3011 Value *PPHI = ensureValueAvailableInSuccessor(PStore->getValueOperand(),
3012 PStore->getParent());
3013 Value *QPHI = ensureValueAvailableInSuccessor(QStore->getValueOperand(),
3014 QStore->getParent(), PPHI);
3015
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith83c4b682015-11-07 00:01:16 +00003016 IRBuilder<> QB(&*PostBB->getFirstInsertionPt());
3017
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003018 Value *PPred = PStore->getParent() == PTB ? PCond : QB.CreateNot(PCond);
3019 Value *QPred = QStore->getParent() == QTB ? QCond : QB.CreateNot(QCond);
3020
3021 if (InvertPCond)
3022 PPred = QB.CreateNot(PPred);
3023 if (InvertQCond)
3024 QPred = QB.CreateNot(QPred);
3025 Value *CombinedPred = QB.CreateOr(PPred, QPred);
3026
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith83c4b682015-11-07 00:01:16 +00003027 auto *T =
3028 SplitBlockAndInsertIfThen(CombinedPred, &*QB.GetInsertPoint(), false);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003029 QB.SetInsertPoint(T);
3030 StoreInst *SI = cast<StoreInst>(QB.CreateStore(QPHI, Address));
3031 AAMDNodes AAMD;
3032 PStore->getAAMetadata(AAMD, /*Merge=*/false);
3033 PStore->getAAMetadata(AAMD, /*Merge=*/true);
3034 SI->setAAMetadata(AAMD);
Alexey Bataev978e2e42017-08-29 20:06:24 +00003035 unsigned PAlignment = PStore->getAlignment();
3036 unsigned QAlignment = QStore->getAlignment();
3037 unsigned TypeAlignment =
3038 DL.getABITypeAlignment(SI->getValueOperand()->getType());
3039 unsigned MinAlignment;
3040 unsigned MaxAlignment;
3041 std::tie(MinAlignment, MaxAlignment) = std::minmax(PAlignment, QAlignment);
3042 // Choose the minimum alignment. If we could prove both stores execute, we
3043 // could use biggest one. In this case, though, we only know that one of the
3044 // stores executes. And we don't know it's safe to take the alignment from a
3045 // store that doesn't execute.
3046 if (MinAlignment != 0) {
3047 // Choose the minimum of all non-zero alignments.
3048 SI->setAlignment(MinAlignment);
3049 } else if (MaxAlignment != 0) {
3050 // Choose the minimal alignment between the non-zero alignment and the ABI
3051 // default alignment for the type of the stored value.
3052 SI->setAlignment(std::min(MaxAlignment, TypeAlignment));
3053 } else {
3054 // If both alignments are zero, use ABI default alignment for the type of
3055 // the stored value.
3056 SI->setAlignment(TypeAlignment);
3057 }
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003058
3059 QStore->eraseFromParent();
3060 PStore->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003061
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003062 return true;
3063}
3064
Alexey Bataev978e2e42017-08-29 20:06:24 +00003065static bool mergeConditionalStores(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *QBI,
3066 const DataLayout &DL) {
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003067 // The intention here is to find diamonds or triangles (see below) where each
3068 // conditional block contains a store to the same address. Both of these
3069 // stores are conditional, so they can't be unconditionally sunk. But it may
3070 // be profitable to speculatively sink the stores into one merged store at the
3071 // end, and predicate the merged store on the union of the two conditions of
3072 // PBI and QBI.
3073 //
3074 // This can reduce the number of stores executed if both of the conditions are
3075 // true, and can allow the blocks to become small enough to be if-converted.
3076 // This optimization will also chain, so that ladders of test-and-set
3077 // sequences can be if-converted away.
3078 //
3079 // We only deal with simple diamonds or triangles:
3080 //
3081 // PBI or PBI or a combination of the two
3082 // / \ | \
3083 // PTB PFB | PFB
3084 // \ / | /
3085 // QBI QBI
3086 // / \ | \
3087 // QTB QFB | QFB
3088 // \ / | /
3089 // PostBB PostBB
3090 //
3091 // We model triangles as a type of diamond with a nullptr "true" block.
3092 // Triangles are canonicalized so that the fallthrough edge is represented by
3093 // a true condition, as in the diagram above.
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003094 BasicBlock *PTB = PBI->getSuccessor(0);
3095 BasicBlock *PFB = PBI->getSuccessor(1);
3096 BasicBlock *QTB = QBI->getSuccessor(0);
3097 BasicBlock *QFB = QBI->getSuccessor(1);
3098 BasicBlock *PostBB = QFB->getSingleSuccessor();
3099
Craig Topper7af07882017-04-21 15:53:42 +00003100 // Make sure we have a good guess for PostBB. If QTB's only successor is
3101 // QFB, then QFB is a better PostBB.
3102 if (QTB->getSingleSuccessor() == QFB)
3103 PostBB = QFB;
3104
3105 // If we couldn't find a good PostBB, stop.
3106 if (!PostBB)
3107 return false;
3108
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003109 bool InvertPCond = false, InvertQCond = false;
3110 // Canonicalize fallthroughs to the true branches.
3111 if (PFB == QBI->getParent()) {
3112 std::swap(PFB, PTB);
3113 InvertPCond = true;
3114 }
3115 if (QFB == PostBB) {
3116 std::swap(QFB, QTB);
3117 InvertQCond = true;
3118 }
3119
3120 // From this point on we can assume PTB or QTB may be fallthroughs but PFB
3121 // and QFB may not. Model fallthroughs as a nullptr block.
3122 if (PTB == QBI->getParent())
3123 PTB = nullptr;
3124 if (QTB == PostBB)
3125 QTB = nullptr;
3126
3127 // Legality bailouts. We must have at least the non-fallthrough blocks and
3128 // the post-dominating block, and the non-fallthroughs must only have one
3129 // predecessor.
3130 auto HasOnePredAndOneSucc = [](BasicBlock *BB, BasicBlock *P, BasicBlock *S) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003131 return BB->getSinglePredecessor() == P && BB->getSingleSuccessor() == S;
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003132 };
Craig Topper7af07882017-04-21 15:53:42 +00003133 if (!HasOnePredAndOneSucc(PFB, PBI->getParent(), QBI->getParent()) ||
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003134 !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(QFB, QBI->getParent(), PostBB))
3135 return false;
3136 if ((PTB && !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(PTB, PBI->getParent(), QBI->getParent())) ||
3137 (QTB && !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(QTB, QBI->getParent(), PostBB)))
3138 return false;
Craig Topper7d3aba62018-04-04 03:47:17 +00003139 if (!QBI->getParent()->hasNUses(2))
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003140 return false;
3141
3142 // OK, this is a sequence of two diamonds or triangles.
3143 // Check if there are stores in PTB or PFB that are repeated in QTB or QFB.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003144 SmallPtrSet<Value *, 4> PStoreAddresses, QStoreAddresses;
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003145 for (auto *BB : {PTB, PFB}) {
3146 if (!BB)
3147 continue;
3148 for (auto &I : *BB)
3149 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I))
3150 PStoreAddresses.insert(SI->getPointerOperand());
3151 }
3152 for (auto *BB : {QTB, QFB}) {
3153 if (!BB)
3154 continue;
3155 for (auto &I : *BB)
3156 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I))
3157 QStoreAddresses.insert(SI->getPointerOperand());
3158 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003159
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003160 set_intersect(PStoreAddresses, QStoreAddresses);
3161 // set_intersect mutates PStoreAddresses in place. Rename it here to make it
3162 // clear what it contains.
3163 auto &CommonAddresses = PStoreAddresses;
3164
3165 bool Changed = false;
3166 for (auto *Address : CommonAddresses)
3167 Changed |= mergeConditionalStoreToAddress(
Alexey Bataev978e2e42017-08-29 20:06:24 +00003168 PTB, PFB, QTB, QFB, PostBB, Address, InvertPCond, InvertQCond, DL);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003169 return Changed;
3170}
3171
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003172/// If we have a conditional branch as a predecessor of another block,
3173/// this function tries to simplify it. We know
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003174/// that PBI and BI are both conditional branches, and BI is in one of the
3175/// successor blocks of PBI - PBI branches to BI.
Philip Reamesb42db212015-10-14 22:46:19 +00003176static bool SimplifyCondBranchToCondBranch(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *BI,
3177 const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003178 assert(PBI->isConditional() && BI->isConditional());
3179 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Dan Gohman5476cfd2009-08-12 16:23:25 +00003180
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003181 // If this block ends with a branch instruction, and if there is a
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003182 // predecessor that ends on a branch of the same condition, make
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003183 // this conditional branch redundant.
3184 if (PBI->getCondition() == BI->getCondition() &&
3185 PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1)) {
3186 // Okay, the outcome of this conditional branch is statically
3187 // knowable. If this block had a single pred, handle specially.
3188 if (BB->getSinglePredecessor()) {
3189 // Turn this into a branch on constant.
3190 bool CondIsTrue = PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003191 BI->setCondition(
3192 ConstantInt::get(Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()), CondIsTrue));
3193 return true; // Nuke the branch on constant.
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003194 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003195
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003196 // Otherwise, if there are multiple predecessors, insert a PHI that merges
3197 // in the constant and simplify the block result. Subsequent passes of
3198 // simplifycfg will thread the block.
3199 if (BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BB)) {
Jay Foade0938d82011-03-30 11:19:20 +00003200 pred_iterator PB = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB);
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003201 PHINode *NewPN = PHINode::Create(
3202 Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()), std::distance(PB, PE),
3203 BI->getCondition()->getName() + ".pr", &BB->front());
Chris Lattner5eed3722008-07-13 21:55:46 +00003204 // Okay, we're going to insert the PHI node. Since PBI is not the only
3205 // predecessor, compute the PHI'd conditional value for all of the preds.
3206 // Any predecessor where the condition is not computable we keep symbolic.
Jay Foade0938d82011-03-30 11:19:20 +00003207 for (pred_iterator PI = PB; PI != PE; ++PI) {
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00003208 BasicBlock *P = *PI;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003209 if ((PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(P->getTerminator())) && PBI != BI &&
3210 PBI->isConditional() && PBI->getCondition() == BI->getCondition() &&
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003211 PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1)) {
3212 bool CondIsTrue = PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003213 NewPN->addIncoming(
3214 ConstantInt::get(Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()), CondIsTrue),
3215 P);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003216 } else {
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00003217 NewPN->addIncoming(BI->getCondition(), P);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003218 }
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00003219 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003220
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003221 BI->setCondition(NewPN);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003222 return true;
3223 }
3224 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003225
Philip Reamesb42db212015-10-14 22:46:19 +00003226 if (auto *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(BI->getCondition()))
3227 if (CE->canTrap())
3228 return false;
3229
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003230 // If both branches are conditional and both contain stores to the same
3231 // address, remove the stores from the conditionals and create a conditional
3232 // merged store at the end.
Alexey Bataev978e2e42017-08-29 20:06:24 +00003233 if (MergeCondStores && mergeConditionalStores(PBI, BI, DL))
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003234 return true;
3235
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003236 // If this is a conditional branch in an empty block, and if any
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00003237 // predecessors are a conditional branch to one of our destinations,
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003238 // fold the conditions into logical ops and one cond br.
Florian Hahn3df88442018-04-30 20:10:53 +00003239
Zhou Sheng264e46e2009-02-26 06:56:37 +00003240 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
Florian Hahn3df88442018-04-30 20:10:53 +00003241 if (&*BB->instructionsWithoutDebug().begin() != BI)
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003242 return false;
Chris Lattnerc59945b2009-01-20 01:15:41 +00003243
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003244 int PBIOp, BIOp;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00003245 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
3246 PBIOp = 0;
3247 BIOp = 0;
3248 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(1)) {
3249 PBIOp = 0;
3250 BIOp = 1;
3251 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
3252 PBIOp = 1;
3253 BIOp = 0;
3254 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BI->getSuccessor(1)) {
3255 PBIOp = 1;
3256 BIOp = 1;
3257 } else {
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003258 return false;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00003259 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003260
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003261 // Check to make sure that the other destination of this branch
3262 // isn't BB itself. If so, this is an infinite loop that will
3263 // keep getting unwound.
3264 if (PBI->getSuccessor(PBIOp) == BB)
3265 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003266
3267 // Do not perform this transformation if it would require
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003268 // insertion of a large number of select instructions. For targets
3269 // without predication/cmovs, this is a big pessimization.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003270
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00003271 // Also do not perform this transformation if any phi node in the common
3272 // destination block can trap when reached by BB or PBB (PR17073). In that
3273 // case, it would be unsafe to hoist the operation into a select instruction.
3274
3275 BasicBlock *CommonDest = PBI->getSuccessor(PBIOp);
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003276 unsigned NumPhis = 0;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003277 for (BasicBlock::iterator II = CommonDest->begin(); isa<PHINode>(II);
3278 ++II, ++NumPhis) {
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003279 if (NumPhis > 2) // Disable this xform.
3280 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003281
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00003282 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(II);
3283 Value *BIV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
3284 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(BIV))
3285 if (CE->canTrap())
3286 return false;
3287
3288 unsigned PBBIdx = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent());
3289 Value *PBIV = PN->getIncomingValue(PBBIdx);
3290 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(PBIV))
3291 if (CE->canTrap())
3292 return false;
3293 }
3294
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003295 // Finally, if everything is ok, fold the branches to logical ops.
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00003296 BasicBlock *OtherDest = BI->getSuccessor(BIOp ^ 1);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003297
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00003298 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING BRs:" << *PBI->getParent()
3299 << "AND: " << *BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003300
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00003301 // If OtherDest *is* BB, then BB is a basic block with a single conditional
3302 // branch in it, where one edge (OtherDest) goes back to itself but the other
3303 // exits. We don't *know* that the program avoids the infinite loop
3304 // (even though that seems likely). If we do this xform naively, we'll end up
3305 // recursively unpeeling the loop. Since we know that (after the xform is
3306 // done) that the block *is* infinite if reached, we just make it an obviously
3307 // infinite loop with no cond branch.
3308 if (OtherDest == BB) {
3309 // Insert it at the end of the function, because it's either code,
3310 // or it won't matter if it's hot. :)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003311 BasicBlock *InfLoopBlock =
3312 BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), "infloop", BB->getParent());
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00003313 BranchInst::Create(InfLoopBlock, InfLoopBlock);
3314 OtherDest = InfLoopBlock;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003315 }
3316
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00003317 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << *PBI->getParent()->getParent());
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00003318
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003319 // BI may have other predecessors. Because of this, we leave
3320 // it alone, but modify PBI.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003321
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003322 // Make sure we get to CommonDest on True&True directions.
3323 Value *PBICond = PBI->getCondition();
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00003324 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(PBI);
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003325 if (PBIOp)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003326 PBICond = Builder.CreateNot(PBICond, PBICond->getName() + ".not");
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00003327
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003328 Value *BICond = BI->getCondition();
3329 if (BIOp)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003330 BICond = Builder.CreateNot(BICond, BICond->getName() + ".not");
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00003331
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003332 // Merge the conditions.
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00003333 Value *Cond = Builder.CreateOr(PBICond, BICond, "brmerge");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003334
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003335 // Modify PBI to branch on the new condition to the new dests.
3336 PBI->setCondition(Cond);
3337 PBI->setSuccessor(0, CommonDest);
3338 PBI->setSuccessor(1, OtherDest);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003339
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00003340 // Update branch weight for PBI.
3341 uint64_t PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight, SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight;
Dehao Chenb76e5d92016-05-10 23:07:19 +00003342 uint64_t PredCommon, PredOther, SuccCommon, SuccOther;
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00003343 bool HasWeights =
3344 extractPredSuccWeights(PBI, BI, PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight,
3345 SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight);
Dehao Chenb76e5d92016-05-10 23:07:19 +00003346 if (HasWeights) {
Dehao Chenb76e5d92016-05-10 23:07:19 +00003347 PredCommon = PBIOp ? PredFalseWeight : PredTrueWeight;
3348 PredOther = PBIOp ? PredTrueWeight : PredFalseWeight;
3349 SuccCommon = BIOp ? SuccFalseWeight : SuccTrueWeight;
3350 SuccOther = BIOp ? SuccTrueWeight : SuccFalseWeight;
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00003351 // The weight to CommonDest should be PredCommon * SuccTotal +
3352 // PredOther * SuccCommon.
3353 // The weight to OtherDest should be PredOther * SuccOther.
Benjamin Kramerea68a942015-02-19 15:26:17 +00003354 uint64_t NewWeights[2] = {PredCommon * (SuccCommon + SuccOther) +
3355 PredOther * SuccCommon,
3356 PredOther * SuccOther};
Sanjay Patel84a0bf62016-05-06 17:51:37 +00003357 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00003358 FitWeights(NewWeights);
3359
Easwaran Raman0a0913d2017-11-09 22:52:20 +00003360 setBranchWeights(PBI, NewWeights[0], NewWeights[1]);
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00003361 }
3362
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003363 // OtherDest may have phi nodes. If so, add an entry from PBI's
3364 // block that are identical to the entries for BI's block.
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00003365 AddPredecessorToBlock(OtherDest, PBI->getParent(), BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003366
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003367 // We know that the CommonDest already had an edge from PBI to
3368 // it. If it has PHIs though, the PHIs may have different
3369 // entries for BB and PBI's BB. If so, insert a select to make
3370 // them agree.
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00003371 for (PHINode &PN : CommonDest->phis()) {
3372 Value *BIV = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
3373 unsigned PBBIdx = PN.getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent());
3374 Value *PBIV = PN.getIncomingValue(PBBIdx);
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003375 if (BIV != PBIV) {
3376 // Insert a select in PBI to pick the right value.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003377 SelectInst *NV = cast<SelectInst>(
3378 Builder.CreateSelect(PBICond, PBIV, BIV, PBIV->getName() + ".mux"));
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00003379 PN.setIncomingValue(PBBIdx, NV);
Sanjay Patel1cb62412016-05-06 18:07:46 +00003380 // Although the select has the same condition as PBI, the original branch
3381 // weights for PBI do not apply to the new select because the select's
3382 // 'logical' edges are incoming edges of the phi that is eliminated, not
3383 // the outgoing edges of PBI.
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00003384 if (HasWeights) {
Sanjay Patel1cb62412016-05-06 18:07:46 +00003385 uint64_t PredCommon = PBIOp ? PredFalseWeight : PredTrueWeight;
3386 uint64_t PredOther = PBIOp ? PredTrueWeight : PredFalseWeight;
3387 uint64_t SuccCommon = BIOp ? SuccFalseWeight : SuccTrueWeight;
3388 uint64_t SuccOther = BIOp ? SuccTrueWeight : SuccFalseWeight;
3389 // The weight to PredCommonDest should be PredCommon * SuccTotal.
3390 // The weight to PredOtherDest should be PredOther * SuccCommon.
3391 uint64_t NewWeights[2] = {PredCommon * (SuccCommon + SuccOther),
3392 PredOther * SuccCommon};
3393
3394 FitWeights(NewWeights);
3395
Easwaran Raman0a0913d2017-11-09 22:52:20 +00003396 setBranchWeights(NV, NewWeights[0], NewWeights[1]);
Sanjay Patel1cb62412016-05-06 18:07:46 +00003397 }
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003398 }
3399 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003400
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00003401 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "INTO: " << *PBI->getParent());
3402 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << *PBI->getParent()->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003403
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003404 // This basic block is probably dead. We know it has at least
3405 // one fewer predecessor.
3406 return true;
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003407}
3408
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003409// Simplifies a terminator by replacing it with a branch to TrueBB if Cond is
3410// true or to FalseBB if Cond is false.
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003411// Takes care of updating the successors and removing the old terminator.
3412// Also makes sure not to introduce new successors by assuming that edges to
3413// non-successor TrueBBs and FalseBBs aren't reachable.
3414static bool SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(TerminatorInst *OldTerm, Value *Cond,
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003415 BasicBlock *TrueBB, BasicBlock *FalseBB,
3416 uint32_t TrueWeight,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003417 uint32_t FalseWeight) {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003418 // Remove any superfluous successor edges from the CFG.
3419 // First, figure out which successors to preserve.
3420 // If TrueBB and FalseBB are equal, only try to preserve one copy of that
3421 // successor.
3422 BasicBlock *KeepEdge1 = TrueBB;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003423 BasicBlock *KeepEdge2 = TrueBB != FalseBB ? FalseBB : nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003424
3425 // Then remove the rest.
Chandler Carruth96fc1de2018-08-26 08:41:15 +00003426 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(OldTerm)) {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003427 // Make sure only to keep exactly one copy of each edge.
3428 if (Succ == KeepEdge1)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003429 KeepEdge1 = nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003430 else if (Succ == KeepEdge2)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003431 KeepEdge2 = nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003432 else
David Majnemerdc3b67b2015-10-21 18:22:24 +00003433 Succ->removePredecessor(OldTerm->getParent(),
3434 /*DontDeleteUselessPHIs=*/true);
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003435 }
3436
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00003437 IRBuilder<> Builder(OldTerm);
3438 Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(OldTerm->getDebugLoc());
3439
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003440 // Insert an appropriate new terminator.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003441 if (!KeepEdge1 && !KeepEdge2) {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003442 if (TrueBB == FalseBB)
3443 // We were only looking for one successor, and it was present.
3444 // Create an unconditional branch to it.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00003445 Builder.CreateBr(TrueBB);
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003446 else {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003447 // We found both of the successors we were looking for.
3448 // Create a conditional branch sharing the condition of the select.
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003449 BranchInst *NewBI = Builder.CreateCondBr(Cond, TrueBB, FalseBB);
3450 if (TrueWeight != FalseWeight)
Easwaran Raman0a0913d2017-11-09 22:52:20 +00003451 setBranchWeights(NewBI, TrueWeight, FalseWeight);
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003452 }
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003453 } else if (KeepEdge1 && (KeepEdge2 || TrueBB == FalseBB)) {
3454 // Neither of the selected blocks were successors, so this
3455 // terminator must be unreachable.
3456 new UnreachableInst(OldTerm->getContext(), OldTerm);
3457 } else {
3458 // One of the selected values was a successor, but the other wasn't.
3459 // Insert an unconditional branch to the one that was found;
3460 // the edge to the one that wasn't must be unreachable.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003461 if (!KeepEdge1)
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003462 // Only TrueBB was found.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00003463 Builder.CreateBr(TrueBB);
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003464 else
3465 // Only FalseBB was found.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00003466 Builder.CreateBr(FalseBB);
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003467 }
3468
3469 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(OldTerm);
3470 return true;
3471}
3472
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003473// Replaces
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003474// (switch (select cond, X, Y)) on constant X, Y
3475// with a branch - conditional if X and Y lead to distinct BBs,
3476// unconditional otherwise.
3477static bool SimplifySwitchOnSelect(SwitchInst *SI, SelectInst *Select) {
3478 // Check for constant integer values in the select.
3479 ConstantInt *TrueVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Select->getTrueValue());
3480 ConstantInt *FalseVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Select->getFalseValue());
3481 if (!TrueVal || !FalseVal)
3482 return false;
3483
3484 // Find the relevant condition and destinations.
3485 Value *Condition = Select->getCondition();
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00003486 BasicBlock *TrueBB = SI->findCaseValue(TrueVal)->getCaseSuccessor();
3487 BasicBlock *FalseBB = SI->findCaseValue(FalseVal)->getCaseSuccessor();
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003488
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003489 // Get weight for TrueBB and FalseBB.
3490 uint32_t TrueWeight = 0, FalseWeight = 0;
3491 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
3492 bool HasWeights = HasBranchWeights(SI);
3493 if (HasWeights) {
3494 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
3495 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003496 TrueWeight =
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00003497 (uint32_t)Weights[SI->findCaseValue(TrueVal)->getSuccessorIndex()];
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003498 FalseWeight =
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00003499 (uint32_t)Weights[SI->findCaseValue(FalseVal)->getSuccessorIndex()];
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003500 }
3501 }
3502
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003503 // Perform the actual simplification.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003504 return SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(SI, Condition, TrueBB, FalseBB, TrueWeight,
3505 FalseWeight);
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003506}
3507
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003508// Replaces
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +00003509// (indirectbr (select cond, blockaddress(@fn, BlockA),
3510// blockaddress(@fn, BlockB)))
3511// with
3512// (br cond, BlockA, BlockB).
3513static bool SimplifyIndirectBrOnSelect(IndirectBrInst *IBI, SelectInst *SI) {
3514 // Check that both operands of the select are block addresses.
3515 BlockAddress *TBA = dyn_cast<BlockAddress>(SI->getTrueValue());
3516 BlockAddress *FBA = dyn_cast<BlockAddress>(SI->getFalseValue());
3517 if (!TBA || !FBA)
3518 return false;
3519
3520 // Extract the actual blocks.
3521 BasicBlock *TrueBB = TBA->getBasicBlock();
3522 BasicBlock *FalseBB = FBA->getBasicBlock();
3523
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003524 // Perform the actual simplification.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003525 return SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(IBI, SI->getCondition(), TrueBB, FalseBB, 0,
3526 0);
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +00003527}
3528
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003529/// This is called when we find an icmp instruction
3530/// (a seteq/setne with a constant) as the only instruction in a
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003531/// block that ends with an uncond branch. We are looking for a very specific
3532/// pattern that occurs when "A == 1 || A == 2 || A == 3" gets simplified. In
3533/// this case, we merge the first two "or's of icmp" into a switch, but then the
3534/// default value goes to an uncond block with a seteq in it, we get something
3535/// like:
3536///
3537/// switch i8 %A, label %DEFAULT [ i8 1, label %end i8 2, label %end ]
3538/// DEFAULT:
3539/// %tmp = icmp eq i8 %A, 92
3540/// br label %end
3541/// end:
3542/// ... = phi i1 [ true, %entry ], [ %tmp, %DEFAULT ], [ true, %entry ]
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003543///
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003544/// We prefer to split the edge to 'end' so that there is a true/false entry to
3545/// the PHI, merging the third icmp into the switch.
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00003546static bool tryToSimplifyUncondBranchWithICmpInIt(
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003547 ICmpInst *ICI, IRBuilder<> &Builder, const DataLayout &DL,
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00003548 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, const SimplifyCFGOptions &Options) {
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003549 BasicBlock *BB = ICI->getParent();
Devang Patel767f6932011-05-18 18:28:48 +00003550
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003551 // If the block has any PHIs in it or the icmp has multiple uses, it is too
3552 // complex.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003553 if (isa<PHINode>(BB->begin()) || !ICI->hasOneUse())
3554 return false;
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003555
3556 Value *V = ICI->getOperand(0);
3557 ConstantInt *Cst = cast<ConstantInt>(ICI->getOperand(1));
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003558
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003559 // The pattern we're looking for is where our only predecessor is a switch on
3560 // 'V' and this block is the default case for the switch. In this case we can
3561 // fold the compared value into the switch to simplify things.
3562 BasicBlock *Pred = BB->getSinglePredecessor();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003563 if (!Pred || !isa<SwitchInst>(Pred->getTerminator()))
3564 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003565
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003566 SwitchInst *SI = cast<SwitchInst>(Pred->getTerminator());
3567 if (SI->getCondition() != V)
3568 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003569
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003570 // If BB is reachable on a non-default case, then we simply know the value of
3571 // V in this block. Substitute it and constant fold the icmp instruction
3572 // away.
3573 if (SI->getDefaultDest() != BB) {
3574 ConstantInt *VVal = SI->findCaseDest(BB);
3575 assert(VVal && "Should have a unique destination value");
3576 ICI->setOperand(0, VVal);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003577
Daniel Berlin4d0fe642017-04-28 19:55:38 +00003578 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(ICI, {DL, ICI})) {
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003579 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003580 ICI->eraseFromParent();
3581 }
3582 // BB is now empty, so it is likely to simplify away.
Justin Bogner6f1740d2018-08-20 06:37:11 +00003583 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) || true;
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003584 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003585
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003586 // Ok, the block is reachable from the default dest. If the constant we're
3587 // comparing exists in one of the other edges, then we can constant fold ICI
3588 // and zap it.
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00003589 if (SI->findCaseValue(Cst) != SI->case_default()) {
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003590 Value *V;
3591 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
3592 V = ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
3593 else
3594 V = ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003595
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003596 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
3597 ICI->eraseFromParent();
3598 // BB is now empty, so it is likely to simplify away.
Justin Bogner6f1740d2018-08-20 06:37:11 +00003599 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) || true;
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003600 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003601
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003602 // The use of the icmp has to be in the 'end' block, by the only PHI node in
3603 // the block.
3604 BasicBlock *SuccBlock = BB->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00003605 PHINode *PHIUse = dyn_cast<PHINode>(ICI->user_back());
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003606 if (PHIUse == nullptr || PHIUse != &SuccBlock->front() ||
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003607 isa<PHINode>(++BasicBlock::iterator(PHIUse)))
3608 return false;
3609
3610 // If the icmp is a SETEQ, then the default dest gets false, the new edge gets
3611 // true in the PHI.
3612 Constant *DefaultCst = ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003613 Constant *NewCst = ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003614
3615 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
3616 std::swap(DefaultCst, NewCst);
3617
3618 // Replace ICI (which is used by the PHI for the default value) with true or
3619 // false depending on if it is EQ or NE.
3620 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(DefaultCst);
3621 ICI->eraseFromParent();
3622
3623 // Okay, the switch goes to this block on a default value. Add an edge from
3624 // the switch to the merge point on the compared value.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003625 BasicBlock *NewBB =
3626 BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), "switch.edge", BB->getParent(), BB);
Manman Rence48ea72012-09-17 23:07:43 +00003627 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
3628 bool HasWeights = HasBranchWeights(SI);
3629 if (HasWeights) {
3630 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
3631 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
3632 // Split weight for default case to case for "Cst".
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003633 Weights[0] = (Weights[0] + 1) >> 1;
Manman Rence48ea72012-09-17 23:07:43 +00003634 Weights.push_back(Weights[0]);
3635
3636 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
Easwaran Raman0a0913d2017-11-09 22:52:20 +00003637 setBranchWeights(SI, MDWeights);
Manman Rence48ea72012-09-17 23:07:43 +00003638 }
3639 }
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003640 SI->addCase(Cst, NewBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003641
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003642 // NewBB branches to the phi block, add the uncond branch and the phi entry.
Devang Patel767f6932011-05-18 18:28:48 +00003643 Builder.SetInsertPoint(NewBB);
3644 Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(SI->getDebugLoc());
3645 Builder.CreateBr(SuccBlock);
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003646 PHIUse->addIncoming(NewCst, NewBB);
3647 return true;
3648}
3649
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003650/// The specified branch is a conditional branch.
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003651/// Check to see if it is branching on an or/and chain of icmp instructions, and
3652/// fold it into a switch instruction if so.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003653static bool SimplifyBranchOnICmpChain(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
3654 const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003655 Instruction *Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003656 if (!Cond)
3657 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003658
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003659 // Change br (X == 0 | X == 1), T, F into a switch instruction.
3660 // If this is a bunch of seteq's or'd together, or if it's a bunch of
3661 // 'setne's and'ed together, collect them.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003662
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +00003663 // Try to gather values from a chain of and/or to be turned into a switch
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +00003664 ConstantComparesGatherer ConstantCompare(Cond, DL);
3665 // Unpack the result
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003666 SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt *> &Values = ConstantCompare.Vals;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +00003667 Value *CompVal = ConstantCompare.CompValue;
3668 unsigned UsedICmps = ConstantCompare.UsedICmps;
3669 Value *ExtraCase = ConstantCompare.Extra;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003670
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003671 // If we didn't have a multiply compared value, fail.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003672 if (!CompVal)
3673 return false;
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003674
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +00003675 // Avoid turning single icmps into a switch.
3676 if (UsedICmps <= 1)
3677 return false;
3678
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +00003679 bool TrueWhenEqual = (Cond->getOpcode() == Instruction::Or);
3680
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003681 // There might be duplicate constants in the list, which the switch
3682 // instruction can't handle, remove them now.
3683 array_pod_sort(Values.begin(), Values.end(), ConstantIntSortPredicate);
3684 Values.erase(std::unique(Values.begin(), Values.end()), Values.end());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003685
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003686 // If Extra was used, we require at least two switch values to do the
Sanjay Patel59661452015-09-10 15:14:34 +00003687 // transformation. A switch with one value is just a conditional branch.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003688 if (ExtraCase && Values.size() < 2)
3689 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003690
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00003691 // TODO: Preserve branch weight metadata, similarly to how
3692 // FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors preserves it.
3693
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003694 // Figure out which block is which destination.
3695 BasicBlock *DefaultBB = BI->getSuccessor(1);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003696 BasicBlock *EdgeBB = BI->getSuccessor(0);
3697 if (!TrueWhenEqual)
3698 std::swap(DefaultBB, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003699
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003700 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003701
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00003702 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Converting 'icmp' chain with " << Values.size()
3703 << " cases into SWITCH. BB is:\n"
3704 << *BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003705
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003706 // If there are any extra values that couldn't be folded into the switch
3707 // then we evaluate them with an explicit branch first. Split the block
3708 // right before the condbr to handle it.
3709 if (ExtraCase) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003710 BasicBlock *NewBB =
3711 BB->splitBasicBlock(BI->getIterator(), "switch.early.test");
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003712 // Remove the uncond branch added to the old block.
3713 TerminatorInst *OldTI = BB->getTerminator();
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003714 Builder.SetInsertPoint(OldTI);
3715
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00003716 if (TrueWhenEqual)
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003717 Builder.CreateCondBr(ExtraCase, EdgeBB, NewBB);
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00003718 else
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003719 Builder.CreateCondBr(ExtraCase, NewBB, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003720
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003721 OldTI->eraseFromParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003722
Chris Lattnercb570f82010-12-13 05:34:18 +00003723 // If there are PHI nodes in EdgeBB, then we need to add a new entry to them
3724 // for the edge we just added.
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00003725 AddPredecessorToBlock(EdgeBB, BB, NewBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003726
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00003727 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << " ** 'icmp' chain unhandled condition: " << *ExtraCase
3728 << "\nEXTRABB = " << *BB);
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003729 BB = NewBB;
3730 }
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003731
3732 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BI);
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003733 // Convert pointer to int before we switch.
3734 if (CompVal->getType()->isPointerTy()) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003735 CompVal = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(
3736 CompVal, DL.getIntPtrType(CompVal->getType()), "magicptr");
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003737 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003738
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003739 // Create the new switch instruction now.
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003740 SwitchInst *New = Builder.CreateSwitch(CompVal, DefaultBB, Values.size());
Devang Patelb849cd52011-05-17 23:29:05 +00003741
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003742 // Add all of the 'cases' to the switch instruction.
3743 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Values.size(); i != e; ++i)
3744 New->addCase(Values[i], EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003745
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003746 // We added edges from PI to the EdgeBB. As such, if there were any
3747 // PHI nodes in EdgeBB, they need entries to be added corresponding to
3748 // the number of edges added.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003749 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = EdgeBB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003750 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
3751 Value *InVal = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003752 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Values.size() - 1; i != e; ++i)
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003753 PN->addIncoming(InVal, BB);
3754 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003755
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003756 // Erase the old branch instruction.
3757 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003758
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00003759 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << " ** 'icmp' chain result is:\n" << *BB << '\n');
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003760 return true;
3761}
3762
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003763bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyResume(ResumeInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003764 if (isa<PHINode>(RI->getValue()))
3765 return SimplifyCommonResume(RI);
3766 else if (isa<LandingPadInst>(RI->getParent()->getFirstNonPHI()) &&
3767 RI->getValue() == RI->getParent()->getFirstNonPHI())
3768 // The resume must unwind the exception that caused control to branch here.
3769 return SimplifySingleResume(RI);
Chen Li509ff212016-01-11 19:20:53 +00003770
3771 return false;
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003772}
3773
3774// Simplify resume that is shared by several landing pads (phi of landing pad).
3775bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyCommonResume(ResumeInst *RI) {
3776 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
3777
3778 // Check that there are no other instructions except for debug intrinsics
3779 // between the phi of landing pads (RI->getValue()) and resume instruction.
3780 BasicBlock::iterator I = cast<Instruction>(RI->getValue())->getIterator(),
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003781 E = RI->getIterator();
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003782 while (++I != E)
3783 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
3784 return false;
3785
Mandeep Singh Grang799a2ed2017-04-24 19:20:45 +00003786 SmallSetVector<BasicBlock *, 4> TrivialUnwindBlocks;
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003787 auto *PhiLPInst = cast<PHINode>(RI->getValue());
3788
3789 // Check incoming blocks to see if any of them are trivial.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003790 for (unsigned Idx = 0, End = PhiLPInst->getNumIncomingValues(); Idx != End;
3791 Idx++) {
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003792 auto *IncomingBB = PhiLPInst->getIncomingBlock(Idx);
3793 auto *IncomingValue = PhiLPInst->getIncomingValue(Idx);
3794
3795 // If the block has other successors, we can not delete it because
3796 // it has other dependents.
3797 if (IncomingBB->getUniqueSuccessor() != BB)
3798 continue;
3799
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003800 auto *LandingPad = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(IncomingBB->getFirstNonPHI());
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003801 // Not the landing pad that caused the control to branch here.
3802 if (IncomingValue != LandingPad)
3803 continue;
3804
3805 bool isTrivial = true;
3806
3807 I = IncomingBB->getFirstNonPHI()->getIterator();
3808 E = IncomingBB->getTerminator()->getIterator();
3809 while (++I != E)
3810 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
3811 isTrivial = false;
3812 break;
3813 }
3814
3815 if (isTrivial)
3816 TrivialUnwindBlocks.insert(IncomingBB);
3817 }
3818
3819 // If no trivial unwind blocks, don't do any simplifications.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003820 if (TrivialUnwindBlocks.empty())
3821 return false;
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003822
3823 // Turn all invokes that unwind here into calls.
3824 for (auto *TrivialBB : TrivialUnwindBlocks) {
3825 // Blocks that will be simplified should be removed from the phi node.
3826 // Note there could be multiple edges to the resume block, and we need
3827 // to remove them all.
3828 while (PhiLPInst->getBasicBlockIndex(TrivialBB) != -1)
3829 BB->removePredecessor(TrivialBB, true);
3830
3831 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(TrivialBB), PE = pred_end(TrivialBB);
3832 PI != PE;) {
3833 BasicBlock *Pred = *PI++;
3834 removeUnwindEdge(Pred);
3835 }
3836
3837 // In each SimplifyCFG run, only the current processed block can be erased.
3838 // Otherwise, it will break the iteration of SimplifyCFG pass. So instead
3839 // of erasing TrivialBB, we only remove the branch to the common resume
3840 // block so that we can later erase the resume block since it has no
3841 // predecessors.
3842 TrivialBB->getTerminator()->eraseFromParent();
3843 new UnreachableInst(RI->getContext(), TrivialBB);
3844 }
3845
3846 // Delete the resume block if all its predecessors have been removed.
3847 if (pred_empty(BB))
3848 BB->eraseFromParent();
3849
3850 return !TrivialUnwindBlocks.empty();
3851}
3852
3853// Simplify resume that is only used by a single (non-phi) landing pad.
3854bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifySingleResume(ResumeInst *RI) {
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003855 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
3856 LandingPadInst *LPInst = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(BB->getFirstNonPHI());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003857 assert(RI->getValue() == LPInst &&
3858 "Resume must unwind the exception that caused control to here");
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003859
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003860 // Check that there are no other instructions except for debug intrinsics.
3861 BasicBlock::iterator I = LPInst->getIterator(), E = RI->getIterator();
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003862 while (++I != E)
3863 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
3864 return false;
3865
Chen Lic6e28782015-10-22 20:48:38 +00003866 // Turn all invokes that unwind here into calls and delete the basic block.
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003867 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB); PI != PE;) {
3868 BasicBlock *Pred = *PI++;
3869 removeUnwindEdge(Pred);
Chen Lic6e28782015-10-22 20:48:38 +00003870 }
3871
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003872 // The landingpad is now unreachable. Zap it.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003873 if (LoopHeaders)
3874 LoopHeaders->erase(BB);
Chijun Simae8263f32018-08-15 13:56:21 +00003875 BB->eraseFromParent();
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003876 return true;
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003877}
3878
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00003879static bool removeEmptyCleanup(CleanupReturnInst *RI) {
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003880 // If this is a trivial cleanup pad that executes no instructions, it can be
3881 // eliminated. If the cleanup pad continues to the caller, any predecessor
3882 // that is an EH pad will be updated to continue to the caller and any
3883 // predecessor that terminates with an invoke instruction will have its invoke
3884 // instruction converted to a call instruction. If the cleanup pad being
3885 // simplified does not continue to the caller, each predecessor will be
3886 // updated to continue to the unwind destination of the cleanup pad being
3887 // simplified.
3888 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003889 CleanupPadInst *CPInst = RI->getCleanupPad();
3890 if (CPInst->getParent() != BB)
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003891 // This isn't an empty cleanup.
3892 return false;
3893
David Majnemer2482e1c2016-06-04 23:50:03 +00003894 // We cannot kill the pad if it has multiple uses. This typically arises
3895 // from unreachable basic blocks.
3896 if (!CPInst->hasOneUse())
3897 return false;
3898
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003899 // Check that there are no other instructions except for benign intrinsics.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003900 BasicBlock::iterator I = CPInst->getIterator(), E = RI->getIterator();
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003901 while (++I != E) {
3902 auto *II = dyn_cast<IntrinsicInst>(I);
3903 if (!II)
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003904 return false;
3905
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003906 Intrinsic::ID IntrinsicID = II->getIntrinsicID();
3907 switch (IntrinsicID) {
3908 case Intrinsic::dbg_declare:
3909 case Intrinsic::dbg_value:
Shiva Chen2c864552018-05-09 02:40:45 +00003910 case Intrinsic::dbg_label:
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003911 case Intrinsic::lifetime_end:
3912 break;
3913 default:
3914 return false;
3915 }
3916 }
3917
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003918 // If the cleanup return we are simplifying unwinds to the caller, this will
3919 // set UnwindDest to nullptr.
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003920 BasicBlock *UnwindDest = RI->getUnwindDest();
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003921 Instruction *DestEHPad = UnwindDest ? UnwindDest->getFirstNonPHI() : nullptr;
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003922
3923 // We're about to remove BB from the control flow. Before we do, sink any
3924 // PHINodes into the unwind destination. Doing this before changing the
3925 // control flow avoids some potentially slow checks, since we can currently
3926 // be certain that UnwindDest and BB have no common predecessors (since they
3927 // are both EH pads).
3928 if (UnwindDest) {
3929 // First, go through the PHI nodes in UnwindDest and update any nodes that
3930 // reference the block we are removing
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003931 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = UnwindDest->begin(),
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003932 IE = DestEHPad->getIterator();
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003933 I != IE; ++I) {
3934 PHINode *DestPN = cast<PHINode>(I);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003935
Andrew Kaylor2a9a6d82015-09-05 01:00:51 +00003936 int Idx = DestPN->getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003937 // Since BB unwinds to UnwindDest, it has to be in the PHI node.
Craig Topper02a55d72015-09-05 04:49:44 +00003938 assert(Idx != -1);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003939 // This PHI node has an incoming value that corresponds to a control
3940 // path through the cleanup pad we are removing. If the incoming
3941 // value is in the cleanup pad, it must be a PHINode (because we
3942 // verified above that the block is otherwise empty). Otherwise, the
3943 // value is either a constant or a value that dominates the cleanup
3944 // pad being removed.
3945 //
3946 // Because BB and UnwindDest are both EH pads, all of their
3947 // predecessors must unwind to these blocks, and since no instruction
3948 // can have multiple unwind destinations, there will be no overlap in
3949 // incoming blocks between SrcPN and DestPN.
3950 Value *SrcVal = DestPN->getIncomingValue(Idx);
3951 PHINode *SrcPN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(SrcVal);
3952
3953 // Remove the entry for the block we are deleting.
3954 DestPN->removeIncomingValue(Idx, false);
3955
3956 if (SrcPN && SrcPN->getParent() == BB) {
3957 // If the incoming value was a PHI node in the cleanup pad we are
3958 // removing, we need to merge that PHI node's incoming values into
3959 // DestPN.
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003960 for (unsigned SrcIdx = 0, SrcE = SrcPN->getNumIncomingValues();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003961 SrcIdx != SrcE; ++SrcIdx) {
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003962 DestPN->addIncoming(SrcPN->getIncomingValue(SrcIdx),
3963 SrcPN->getIncomingBlock(SrcIdx));
3964 }
3965 } else {
3966 // Otherwise, the incoming value came from above BB and
3967 // so we can just reuse it. We must associate all of BB's
3968 // predecessors with this value.
3969 for (auto *pred : predecessors(BB)) {
3970 DestPN->addIncoming(SrcVal, pred);
3971 }
3972 }
3973 }
3974
3975 // Sink any remaining PHI nodes directly into UnwindDest.
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003976 Instruction *InsertPt = DestEHPad;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003977 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(),
3978 IE = BB->getFirstNonPHI()->getIterator();
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003979 I != IE;) {
3980 // The iterator must be incremented here because the instructions are
3981 // being moved to another block.
3982 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(I++);
3983 if (PN->use_empty())
3984 // If the PHI node has no uses, just leave it. It will be erased
3985 // when we erase BB below.
3986 continue;
3987
3988 // Otherwise, sink this PHI node into UnwindDest.
3989 // Any predecessors to UnwindDest which are not already represented
3990 // must be back edges which inherit the value from the path through
3991 // BB. In this case, the PHI value must reference itself.
3992 for (auto *pred : predecessors(UnwindDest))
3993 if (pred != BB)
3994 PN->addIncoming(PN, pred);
3995 PN->moveBefore(InsertPt);
3996 }
3997 }
3998
3999 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB); PI != PE;) {
4000 // The iterator must be updated here because we are removing this pred.
4001 BasicBlock *PredBB = *PI++;
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00004002 if (UnwindDest == nullptr) {
Joseph Tremoulet09af67a2015-09-27 01:47:46 +00004003 removeUnwindEdge(PredBB);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00004004 } else {
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00004005 TerminatorInst *TI = PredBB->getTerminator();
Joseph Tremoulet09af67a2015-09-27 01:47:46 +00004006 TI->replaceUsesOfWith(BB, UnwindDest);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00004007 }
4008 }
4009
4010 // The cleanup pad is now unreachable. Zap it.
4011 BB->eraseFromParent();
4012 return true;
4013}
4014
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00004015// Try to merge two cleanuppads together.
4016static bool mergeCleanupPad(CleanupReturnInst *RI) {
4017 // Skip any cleanuprets which unwind to caller, there is nothing to merge
4018 // with.
4019 BasicBlock *UnwindDest = RI->getUnwindDest();
4020 if (!UnwindDest)
4021 return false;
4022
4023 // This cleanupret isn't the only predecessor of this cleanuppad, it wouldn't
4024 // be safe to merge without code duplication.
4025 if (UnwindDest->getSinglePredecessor() != RI->getParent())
4026 return false;
4027
4028 // Verify that our cleanuppad's unwind destination is another cleanuppad.
4029 auto *SuccessorCleanupPad = dyn_cast<CleanupPadInst>(&UnwindDest->front());
4030 if (!SuccessorCleanupPad)
4031 return false;
4032
4033 CleanupPadInst *PredecessorCleanupPad = RI->getCleanupPad();
4034 // Replace any uses of the successor cleanupad with the predecessor pad
4035 // The only cleanuppad uses should be this cleanupret, it's cleanupret and
4036 // funclet bundle operands.
4037 SuccessorCleanupPad->replaceAllUsesWith(PredecessorCleanupPad);
4038 // Remove the old cleanuppad.
4039 SuccessorCleanupPad->eraseFromParent();
4040 // Now, we simply replace the cleanupret with a branch to the unwind
4041 // destination.
4042 BranchInst::Create(UnwindDest, RI->getParent());
4043 RI->eraseFromParent();
4044
4045 return true;
4046}
4047
4048bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyCleanupReturn(CleanupReturnInst *RI) {
David Majnemeree0cbbb2016-02-24 17:30:48 +00004049 // It is possible to transiantly have an undef cleanuppad operand because we
4050 // have deleted some, but not all, dead blocks.
4051 // Eventually, this block will be deleted.
4052 if (isa<UndefValue>(RI->getOperand(0)))
4053 return false;
4054
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00004055 if (mergeCleanupPad(RI))
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00004056 return true;
4057
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00004058 if (removeEmptyCleanup(RI))
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00004059 return true;
4060
4061 return false;
4062}
4063
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00004064bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyReturn(ReturnInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004065 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004066 if (!BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator())
4067 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004068
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004069 // Find predecessors that end with branches.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004070 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> UncondBranchPreds;
4071 SmallVector<BranchInst *, 8> CondBranchPreds;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00004072 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI) {
4073 BasicBlock *P = *PI;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004074 TerminatorInst *PTI = P->getTerminator();
4075 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PTI)) {
4076 if (BI->isUnconditional())
4077 UncondBranchPreds.push_back(P);
4078 else
4079 CondBranchPreds.push_back(BI);
4080 }
4081 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004082
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004083 // If we found some, do the transformation!
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +00004084 if (!UncondBranchPreds.empty() && DupRet) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004085 while (!UncondBranchPreds.empty()) {
4086 BasicBlock *Pred = UncondBranchPreds.pop_back_val();
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00004087 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING: " << *BB
4088 << "INTO UNCOND BRANCH PRED: " << *Pred);
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +00004089 (void)FoldReturnIntoUncondBranch(RI, BB, Pred);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004090 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004091
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004092 // If we eliminated all predecessors of the block, delete the block now.
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +00004093 if (pred_empty(BB)) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004094 // We know there are no successors, so just nuke the block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004095 if (LoopHeaders)
4096 LoopHeaders->erase(BB);
Chijun Simae8263f32018-08-15 13:56:21 +00004097 BB->eraseFromParent();
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +00004098 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004099
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004100 return true;
4101 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004102
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004103 // Check out all of the conditional branches going to this return
4104 // instruction. If any of them just select between returns, change the
4105 // branch itself into a select/return pair.
4106 while (!CondBranchPreds.empty()) {
4107 BranchInst *BI = CondBranchPreds.pop_back_val();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004108
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004109 // Check to see if the non-BB successor is also a return block.
4110 if (isa<ReturnInst>(BI->getSuccessor(0)->getTerminator()) &&
4111 isa<ReturnInst>(BI->getSuccessor(1)->getTerminator()) &&
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00004112 SimplifyCondBranchToTwoReturns(BI, Builder))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004113 return true;
4114 }
4115 return false;
4116}
4117
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004118bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyUnreachable(UnreachableInst *UI) {
4119 BasicBlock *BB = UI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004120
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004121 bool Changed = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004122
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004123 // If there are any instructions immediately before the unreachable that can
4124 // be removed, do so.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00004125 while (UI->getIterator() != BB->begin()) {
4126 BasicBlock::iterator BBI = UI->getIterator();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004127 --BBI;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004128 // Do not delete instructions that can have side effects which might cause
4129 // the unreachable to not be reachable; specifically, calls and volatile
4130 // operations may have this effect.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004131 if (isa<CallInst>(BBI) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
4132 break;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004133
4134 if (BBI->mayHaveSideEffects()) {
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004135 if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004136 if (SI->isVolatile())
4137 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004138 } else if (auto *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004139 if (LI->isVolatile())
4140 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004141 } else if (auto *RMWI = dyn_cast<AtomicRMWInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004142 if (RMWI->isVolatile())
4143 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004144 } else if (auto *CXI = dyn_cast<AtomicCmpXchgInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004145 if (CXI->isVolatile())
4146 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004147 } else if (isa<CatchPadInst>(BBI)) {
4148 // A catchpad may invoke exception object constructors and such, which
4149 // in some languages can be arbitrary code, so be conservative by
4150 // default.
4151 // For CoreCLR, it just involves a type test, so can be removed.
4152 if (classifyEHPersonality(BB->getParent()->getPersonalityFn()) !=
4153 EHPersonality::CoreCLR)
4154 break;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004155 } else if (!isa<FenceInst>(BBI) && !isa<VAArgInst>(BBI) &&
4156 !isa<LandingPadInst>(BBI)) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004157 break;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004158 }
Bill Wendling55d875f2011-08-16 20:41:17 +00004159 // Note that deleting LandingPad's here is in fact okay, although it
4160 // involves a bit of subtle reasoning. If this inst is a LandingPad,
4161 // all the predecessors of this block will be the unwind edges of Invokes,
4162 // and we can therefore guarantee this block will be erased.
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004163 }
4164
Eli Friedmanaac35b32011-03-09 00:48:33 +00004165 // Delete this instruction (any uses are guaranteed to be dead)
4166 if (!BBI->use_empty())
4167 BBI->replaceAllUsesWith(UndefValue::get(BBI->getType()));
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00004168 BBI->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004169 Changed = true;
4170 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004171
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004172 // If the unreachable instruction is the first in the block, take a gander
4173 // at all of the predecessors of this instruction, and simplify them.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004174 if (&BB->front() != UI)
4175 return Changed;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004176
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004177 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> Preds(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004178 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Preds.size(); i != e; ++i) {
4179 TerminatorInst *TI = Preds[i]->getTerminator();
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00004180 IRBuilder<> Builder(TI);
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004181 if (auto *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004182 if (BI->isUnconditional()) {
4183 if (BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
4184 new UnreachableInst(TI->getContext(), TI);
4185 TI->eraseFromParent();
4186 Changed = true;
4187 }
4188 } else {
4189 if (BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00004190 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(1));
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004191 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
4192 } else if (BI->getSuccessor(1) == BB) {
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00004193 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(0));
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004194 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
4195 Changed = true;
4196 }
4197 }
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004198 } else if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
Chandler Carruth0d256c02017-03-26 02:49:23 +00004199 for (auto i = SI->case_begin(), e = SI->case_end(); i != e;) {
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00004200 if (i->getCaseSuccessor() != BB) {
Chandler Carruth0d256c02017-03-26 02:49:23 +00004201 ++i;
4202 continue;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004203 }
Chandler Carruth0d256c02017-03-26 02:49:23 +00004204 BB->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
4205 i = SI->removeCase(i);
4206 e = SI->case_end();
4207 Changed = true;
4208 }
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004209 } else if (auto *II = dyn_cast<InvokeInst>(TI)) {
4210 if (II->getUnwindDest() == BB) {
4211 removeUnwindEdge(TI->getParent());
4212 Changed = true;
4213 }
4214 } else if (auto *CSI = dyn_cast<CatchSwitchInst>(TI)) {
4215 if (CSI->getUnwindDest() == BB) {
4216 removeUnwindEdge(TI->getParent());
4217 Changed = true;
4218 continue;
4219 }
4220
4221 for (CatchSwitchInst::handler_iterator I = CSI->handler_begin(),
4222 E = CSI->handler_end();
4223 I != E; ++I) {
4224 if (*I == BB) {
4225 CSI->removeHandler(I);
4226 --I;
4227 --E;
4228 Changed = true;
4229 }
4230 }
4231 if (CSI->getNumHandlers() == 0) {
4232 BasicBlock *CatchSwitchBB = CSI->getParent();
4233 if (CSI->hasUnwindDest()) {
4234 // Redirect preds to the unwind dest
4235 CatchSwitchBB->replaceAllUsesWith(CSI->getUnwindDest());
4236 } else {
4237 // Rewrite all preds to unwind to caller (or from invoke to call).
4238 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> EHPreds(predecessors(CatchSwitchBB));
4239 for (BasicBlock *EHPred : EHPreds)
4240 removeUnwindEdge(EHPred);
4241 }
4242 // The catchswitch is no longer reachable.
4243 new UnreachableInst(CSI->getContext(), CSI);
4244 CSI->eraseFromParent();
4245 Changed = true;
4246 }
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00004247 } else if (isa<CleanupReturnInst>(TI)) {
Joseph Tremoulet09af67a2015-09-27 01:47:46 +00004248 new UnreachableInst(TI->getContext(), TI);
4249 TI->eraseFromParent();
4250 Changed = true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004251 }
4252 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004253
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004254 // If this block is now dead, remove it.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004255 if (pred_empty(BB) && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock()) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004256 // We know there are no successors, so just nuke the block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004257 if (LoopHeaders)
4258 LoopHeaders->erase(BB);
Chijun Simae8263f32018-08-15 13:56:21 +00004259 BB->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004260 return true;
4261 }
4262
4263 return Changed;
4264}
4265
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004266static bool CasesAreContiguous(SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt *> &Cases) {
4267 assert(Cases.size() >= 1);
4268
4269 array_pod_sort(Cases.begin(), Cases.end(), ConstantIntSortPredicate);
4270 for (size_t I = 1, E = Cases.size(); I != E; ++I) {
4271 if (Cases[I - 1]->getValue() != Cases[I]->getValue() + 1)
4272 return false;
4273 }
4274 return true;
4275}
4276
4277/// Turn a switch with two reachable destinations into an integer range
4278/// comparison and branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00004279static bool TurnSwitchRangeIntoICmp(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Stepan Dyatkovskiy513aaa52012-02-01 07:49:51 +00004280 assert(SI->getNumCases() > 1 && "Degenerate switch?");
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004281
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004282 bool HasDefault =
4283 !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
Benjamin Kramer62aa46b2011-02-03 22:51:41 +00004284
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004285 // Partition the cases into two sets with different destinations.
4286 BasicBlock *DestA = HasDefault ? SI->getDefaultDest() : nullptr;
4287 BasicBlock *DestB = nullptr;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004288 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 16> CasesA;
4289 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 16> CasesB;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004290
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00004291 for (auto Case : SI->cases()) {
4292 BasicBlock *Dest = Case.getCaseSuccessor();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004293 if (!DestA)
4294 DestA = Dest;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004295 if (Dest == DestA) {
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00004296 CasesA.push_back(Case.getCaseValue());
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004297 continue;
4298 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004299 if (!DestB)
4300 DestB = Dest;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004301 if (Dest == DestB) {
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00004302 CasesB.push_back(Case.getCaseValue());
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004303 continue;
4304 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004305 return false; // More than two destinations.
Benjamin Kramer62aa46b2011-02-03 22:51:41 +00004306 }
4307
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004308 assert(DestA && DestB &&
4309 "Single-destination switch should have been folded.");
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004310 assert(DestA != DestB);
4311 assert(DestB != SI->getDefaultDest());
4312 assert(!CasesB.empty() && "There must be non-default cases.");
4313 assert(!CasesA.empty() || HasDefault);
4314
4315 // Figure out if one of the sets of cases form a contiguous range.
4316 SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt *> *ContiguousCases = nullptr;
4317 BasicBlock *ContiguousDest = nullptr;
4318 BasicBlock *OtherDest = nullptr;
4319 if (!CasesA.empty() && CasesAreContiguous(CasesA)) {
4320 ContiguousCases = &CasesA;
4321 ContiguousDest = DestA;
4322 OtherDest = DestB;
4323 } else if (CasesAreContiguous(CasesB)) {
4324 ContiguousCases = &CasesB;
4325 ContiguousDest = DestB;
4326 OtherDest = DestA;
4327 } else
4328 return false;
4329
4330 // Start building the compare and branch.
4331
4332 Constant *Offset = ConstantExpr::getNeg(ContiguousCases->back());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004333 Constant *NumCases =
4334 ConstantInt::get(Offset->getType(), ContiguousCases->size());
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004335
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +00004336 Value *Sub = SI->getCondition();
4337 if (!Offset->isNullValue())
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004338 Sub = Builder.CreateAdd(Sub, Offset, Sub->getName() + ".off");
4339
Hans Wennborgc9e1d992013-04-16 08:35:36 +00004340 Value *Cmp;
4341 // If NumCases overflowed, then all possible values jump to the successor.
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004342 if (NumCases->isNullValue() && !ContiguousCases->empty())
Hans Wennborgc9e1d992013-04-16 08:35:36 +00004343 Cmp = ConstantInt::getTrue(SI->getContext());
4344 else
4345 Cmp = Builder.CreateICmpULT(Sub, NumCases, "switch");
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004346 BranchInst *NewBI = Builder.CreateCondBr(Cmp, ContiguousDest, OtherDest);
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004347
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004348 // Update weight for the newly-created conditional branch.
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004349 if (HasBranchWeights(SI)) {
4350 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004351 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
4352 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004353 uint64_t TrueWeight = 0;
4354 uint64_t FalseWeight = 0;
4355 for (size_t I = 0, E = Weights.size(); I != E; ++I) {
4356 if (SI->getSuccessor(I) == ContiguousDest)
4357 TrueWeight += Weights[I];
4358 else
4359 FalseWeight += Weights[I];
4360 }
4361 while (TrueWeight > UINT32_MAX || FalseWeight > UINT32_MAX) {
4362 TrueWeight /= 2;
4363 FalseWeight /= 2;
4364 }
Easwaran Raman0a0913d2017-11-09 22:52:20 +00004365 setBranchWeights(NewBI, TrueWeight, FalseWeight);
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004366 }
4367 }
4368
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004369 // Prune obsolete incoming values off the successors' PHI nodes.
4370 for (auto BBI = ContiguousDest->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
4371 unsigned PreviousEdges = ContiguousCases->size();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004372 if (ContiguousDest == SI->getDefaultDest())
4373 ++PreviousEdges;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004374 for (unsigned I = 0, E = PreviousEdges - 1; I != E; ++I)
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004375 cast<PHINode>(BBI)->removeIncomingValue(SI->getParent());
4376 }
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004377 for (auto BBI = OtherDest->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
4378 unsigned PreviousEdges = SI->getNumCases() - ContiguousCases->size();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004379 if (OtherDest == SI->getDefaultDest())
4380 ++PreviousEdges;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004381 for (unsigned I = 0, E = PreviousEdges - 1; I != E; ++I)
4382 cast<PHINode>(BBI)->removeIncomingValue(SI->getParent());
4383 }
4384
4385 // Drop the switch.
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004386 SI->eraseFromParent();
4387
4388 return true;
4389}
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004390
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004391/// Compute masked bits for the condition of a switch
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004392/// and use it to remove dead cases.
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00004393static bool eliminateDeadSwitchCases(SwitchInst *SI, AssumptionCache *AC,
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00004394 const DataLayout &DL) {
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004395 Value *Cond = SI->getCondition();
Matt Arsenault8227b9f2013-09-06 00:37:24 +00004396 unsigned Bits = Cond->getType()->getIntegerBitWidth();
Craig Topper8205a1a2017-05-24 16:53:07 +00004397 KnownBits Known = computeKnownBits(Cond, DL, 0, AC, SI);
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004398
Sanjay Patel75892a12016-05-20 14:53:09 +00004399 // We can also eliminate cases by determining that their values are outside of
4400 // the limited range of the condition based on how many significant (non-sign)
4401 // bits are in the condition value.
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00004402 unsigned ExtraSignBits = ComputeNumSignBits(Cond, DL, 0, AC, SI) - 1;
Sanjay Patel75892a12016-05-20 14:53:09 +00004403 unsigned MaxSignificantBitsInCond = Bits - ExtraSignBits;
4404
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004405 // Gather dead cases.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004406 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 8> DeadCases;
Sanjay Patel5d5134f2016-05-13 20:24:53 +00004407 for (auto &Case : SI->cases()) {
Craig Toppere777fed2017-05-22 00:49:35 +00004408 const APInt &CaseVal = Case.getCaseValue()->getValue();
Craig Topperb45eabc2017-04-26 16:39:58 +00004409 if (Known.Zero.intersects(CaseVal) || !Known.One.isSubsetOf(CaseVal) ||
Sanjay Patel75892a12016-05-20 14:53:09 +00004410 (CaseVal.getMinSignedBits() > MaxSignificantBitsInCond)) {
Sanjay Patel5d5134f2016-05-13 20:24:53 +00004411 DeadCases.push_back(Case.getCaseValue());
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00004412 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "SimplifyCFG: switch case " << CaseVal
4413 << " is dead.\n");
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004414 }
4415 }
4416
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004417 // If we can prove that the cases must cover all possible values, the
4418 // default destination becomes dead and we can remove it. If we know some
Philip Reames05370132015-09-10 17:44:47 +00004419 // of the bits in the value, we can use that to more precisely compute the
4420 // number of possible unique case values.
Philip Reames98a2dab2015-08-26 23:56:46 +00004421 bool HasDefault =
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004422 !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
4423 const unsigned NumUnknownBits =
Craig Topperb45eabc2017-04-26 16:39:58 +00004424 Bits - (Known.Zero | Known.One).countPopulation();
Filipe Cabecinhas48b090a2015-09-10 22:34:39 +00004425 assert(NumUnknownBits <= Bits);
Philip Reames05370132015-09-10 17:44:47 +00004426 if (HasDefault && DeadCases.empty() &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004427 NumUnknownBits < 64 /* avoid overflow */ &&
Philip Reames05370132015-09-10 17:44:47 +00004428 SI->getNumCases() == (1ULL << NumUnknownBits)) {
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00004429 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "SimplifyCFG: switch default is dead.\n");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004430 BasicBlock *NewDefault =
4431 SplitBlockPredecessors(SI->getDefaultDest(), SI->getParent(), "");
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00004432 SI->setDefaultDest(&*NewDefault);
4433 SplitBlock(&*NewDefault, &NewDefault->front());
Philip Reames98a2dab2015-08-26 23:56:46 +00004434 auto *OldTI = NewDefault->getTerminator();
4435 new UnreachableInst(SI->getContext(), OldTI);
4436 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(OldTI);
4437 return true;
4438 }
4439
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004440 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
4441 bool HasWeight = HasBranchWeights(SI);
4442 if (HasWeight) {
4443 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
4444 HasWeight = (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases());
4445 }
4446
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004447 // Remove dead cases from the switch.
Sanjay Patel5d5134f2016-05-13 20:24:53 +00004448 for (ConstantInt *DeadCase : DeadCases) {
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00004449 SwitchInst::CaseIt CaseI = SI->findCaseValue(DeadCase);
4450 assert(CaseI != SI->case_default() &&
Stepan Dyatkovskiy513aaa52012-02-01 07:49:51 +00004451 "Case was not found. Probably mistake in DeadCases forming.");
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004452 if (HasWeight) {
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00004453 std::swap(Weights[CaseI->getCaseIndex() + 1], Weights.back());
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004454 Weights.pop_back();
4455 }
4456
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004457 // Prune unused values from PHI nodes.
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00004458 CaseI->getCaseSuccessor()->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
4459 SI->removeCase(CaseI);
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004460 }
Justin Bogner0ba3f212013-12-20 08:21:30 +00004461 if (HasWeight && Weights.size() >= 2) {
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004462 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
Easwaran Raman0a0913d2017-11-09 22:52:20 +00004463 setBranchWeights(SI, MDWeights);
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004464 }
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004465
4466 return !DeadCases.empty();
4467}
4468
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004469/// If BB would be eligible for simplification by
4470/// TryToSimplifyUncondBranchFromEmptyBlock (i.e. it is empty and terminated
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004471/// by an unconditional branch), look at the phi node for BB in the successor
4472/// block and see if the incoming value is equal to CaseValue. If so, return
4473/// the phi node, and set PhiIndex to BB's index in the phi node.
4474static PHINode *FindPHIForConditionForwarding(ConstantInt *CaseValue,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004475 BasicBlock *BB, int *PhiIndex) {
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004476 if (BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg() != BB->getTerminator())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004477 return nullptr; // BB must be empty to be a candidate for simplification.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004478 if (!BB->getSinglePredecessor())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004479 return nullptr; // BB must be dominated by the switch.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004480
4481 BranchInst *Branch = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator());
4482 if (!Branch || !Branch->isUnconditional())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004483 return nullptr; // Terminator must be unconditional branch.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004484
4485 BasicBlock *Succ = Branch->getSuccessor(0);
4486
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00004487 for (PHINode &PHI : Succ->phis()) {
4488 int Idx = PHI.getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004489 assert(Idx >= 0 && "PHI has no entry for predecessor?");
4490
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00004491 Value *InValue = PHI.getIncomingValue(Idx);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004492 if (InValue != CaseValue)
4493 continue;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004494
4495 *PhiIndex = Idx;
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00004496 return &PHI;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004497 }
4498
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004499 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004500}
4501
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004502/// Try to forward the condition of a switch instruction to a phi node
4503/// dominated by the switch, if that would mean that some of the destination
Sanjay Patel30f30d32017-10-15 14:43:39 +00004504/// blocks of the switch can be folded away. Return true if a change is made.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004505static bool ForwardSwitchConditionToPHI(SwitchInst *SI) {
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00004506 using ForwardingNodesMap = DenseMap<PHINode *, SmallVector<int, 4>>;
4507
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004508 ForwardingNodesMap ForwardingNodes;
Sanjay Patel24226502017-10-22 16:51:03 +00004509 BasicBlock *SwitchBlock = SI->getParent();
4510 bool Changed = false;
Sanjay Patel30f30d32017-10-15 14:43:39 +00004511 for (auto &Case : SI->cases()) {
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00004512 ConstantInt *CaseValue = Case.getCaseValue();
4513 BasicBlock *CaseDest = Case.getCaseSuccessor();
Sanjay Patel24226502017-10-22 16:51:03 +00004514
4515 // Replace phi operands in successor blocks that are using the constant case
4516 // value rather than the switch condition variable:
4517 // switchbb:
4518 // switch i32 %x, label %default [
4519 // i32 17, label %succ
4520 // ...
4521 // succ:
4522 // %r = phi i32 ... [ 17, %switchbb ] ...
4523 // -->
4524 // %r = phi i32 ... [ %x, %switchbb ] ...
4525
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00004526 for (PHINode &Phi : CaseDest->phis()) {
Sanjay Patel24226502017-10-22 16:51:03 +00004527 // This only works if there is exactly 1 incoming edge from the switch to
4528 // a phi. If there is >1, that means multiple cases of the switch map to 1
4529 // value in the phi, and that phi value is not the switch condition. Thus,
4530 // this transform would not make sense (the phi would be invalid because
4531 // a phi can't have different incoming values from the same block).
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00004532 int SwitchBBIdx = Phi.getBasicBlockIndex(SwitchBlock);
4533 if (Phi.getIncomingValue(SwitchBBIdx) == CaseValue &&
4534 count(Phi.blocks(), SwitchBlock) == 1) {
4535 Phi.setIncomingValue(SwitchBBIdx, SI->getCondition());
Sanjay Patel24226502017-10-22 16:51:03 +00004536 Changed = true;
4537 }
4538 }
4539
4540 // Collect phi nodes that are indirectly using this switch's case constants.
Sanjay Patel30f30d32017-10-15 14:43:39 +00004541 int PhiIdx;
4542 if (auto *Phi = FindPHIForConditionForwarding(CaseValue, CaseDest, &PhiIdx))
4543 ForwardingNodes[Phi].push_back(PhiIdx);
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004544 }
4545
Sanjay Patel30f30d32017-10-15 14:43:39 +00004546 for (auto &ForwardingNode : ForwardingNodes) {
4547 PHINode *Phi = ForwardingNode.first;
4548 SmallVectorImpl<int> &Indexes = ForwardingNode.second;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004549 if (Indexes.size() < 2)
4550 continue;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004551
Sanjay Patel30f30d32017-10-15 14:43:39 +00004552 for (int Index : Indexes)
4553 Phi->setIncomingValue(Index, SI->getCondition());
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004554 Changed = true;
4555 }
4556
4557 return Changed;
4558}
4559
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004560/// Return true if the backend will be able to handle
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004561/// initializing an array of constants like C.
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004562static bool ValidLookupTableConstant(Constant *C, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Hans Wennborg4dc89512014-06-20 00:38:12 +00004563 if (C->isThreadDependent())
4564 return false;
4565 if (C->isDLLImportDependent())
4566 return false;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004567
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004568 if (!isa<ConstantFP>(C) && !isa<ConstantInt>(C) &&
4569 !isa<ConstantPointerNull>(C) && !isa<GlobalValue>(C) &&
4570 !isa<UndefValue>(C) && !isa<ConstantExpr>(C))
4571 return false;
Hans Wennborgb03ebfb2014-06-26 00:30:52 +00004572
Oliver Stannardfe4432b2016-10-17 12:00:24 +00004573 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(C)) {
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004574 if (!CE->isGEPWithNoNotionalOverIndexing())
4575 return false;
Oliver Stannardfe4432b2016-10-17 12:00:24 +00004576 if (!ValidLookupTableConstant(CE->getOperand(0), TTI))
4577 return false;
4578 }
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004579
4580 if (!TTI.shouldBuildLookupTablesForConstant(C))
4581 return false;
4582
4583 return true;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004584}
4585
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004586/// If V is a Constant, return it. Otherwise, try to look up
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00004587/// its constant value in ConstantPool, returning 0 if it's not there.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004588static Constant *
4589LookupConstant(Value *V,
4590 const SmallDenseMap<Value *, Constant *> &ConstantPool) {
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00004591 if (Constant *C = dyn_cast<Constant>(V))
4592 return C;
4593 return ConstantPool.lookup(V);
4594}
4595
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004596/// Try to fold instruction I into a constant. This works for
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004597/// simple instructions such as binary operations where both operands are
4598/// constant or can be replaced by constants from the ConstantPool. Returns the
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00004599/// resulting constant on success, 0 otherwise.
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004600static Constant *
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004601ConstantFold(Instruction *I, const DataLayout &DL,
4602 const SmallDenseMap<Value *, Constant *> &ConstantPool) {
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004603 if (SelectInst *Select = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(I)) {
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00004604 Constant *A = LookupConstant(Select->getCondition(), ConstantPool);
4605 if (!A)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004606 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00004607 if (A->isAllOnesValue())
4608 return LookupConstant(Select->getTrueValue(), ConstantPool);
4609 if (A->isNullValue())
4610 return LookupConstant(Select->getFalseValue(), ConstantPool);
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004611 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004612 }
4613
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004614 SmallVector<Constant *, 4> COps;
4615 for (unsigned N = 0, E = I->getNumOperands(); N != E; ++N) {
4616 if (Constant *A = LookupConstant(I->getOperand(N), ConstantPool))
4617 COps.push_back(A);
4618 else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004619 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004620 }
4621
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004622 if (CmpInst *Cmp = dyn_cast<CmpInst>(I)) {
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004623 return ConstantFoldCompareInstOperands(Cmp->getPredicate(), COps[0],
4624 COps[1], DL);
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004625 }
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004626
Manuel Jacobe9024592016-01-21 06:33:22 +00004627 return ConstantFoldInstOperands(I, COps, DL);
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004628}
4629
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004630/// Try to determine the resulting constant values in phi nodes
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004631/// at the common destination basic block, *CommonDest, for one of the case
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00004632/// destionations CaseDest corresponding to value CaseVal (0 for the default
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004633/// case), of a switch instruction SI.
Craig Topperb94011f2013-07-14 04:42:23 +00004634static bool
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004635GetCaseResults(SwitchInst *SI, ConstantInt *CaseVal, BasicBlock *CaseDest,
Craig Topperb94011f2013-07-14 04:42:23 +00004636 BasicBlock **CommonDest,
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00004637 SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>> &Res,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004638 const DataLayout &DL, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004639 // The block from which we enter the common destination.
4640 BasicBlock *Pred = SI->getParent();
4641
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004642 // If CaseDest is empty except for some side-effect free instructions through
4643 // which we can constant-propagate the CaseVal, continue to its successor.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004644 SmallDenseMap<Value *, Constant *> ConstantPool;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004645 ConstantPool.insert(std::make_pair(SI->getCondition(), CaseVal));
Florian Hahn3df88442018-04-30 20:10:53 +00004646 for (Instruction &I :CaseDest->instructionsWithoutDebug()) {
4647 if (TerminatorInst *T = dyn_cast<TerminatorInst>(&I)) {
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004648 // If the terminator is a simple branch, continue to the next block.
Chandler Carruth698fbe72018-08-26 08:56:42 +00004649 if (T->getNumSuccessors() != 1 || T->isExceptionalTerminator())
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004650 return false;
4651 Pred = CaseDest;
4652 CaseDest = T->getSuccessor(0);
Florian Hahn3df88442018-04-30 20:10:53 +00004653 } else if (Constant *C = ConstantFold(&I, DL, ConstantPool)) {
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004654 // Instruction is side-effect free and constant.
Hans Wennborgdcc6e5b2015-01-09 22:13:31 +00004655
4656 // If the instruction has uses outside this block or a phi node slot for
4657 // the block, it is not safe to bypass the instruction since it would then
4658 // no longer dominate all its uses.
Florian Hahn3df88442018-04-30 20:10:53 +00004659 for (auto &Use : I.uses()) {
Hans Wennborgdcc6e5b2015-01-09 22:13:31 +00004660 User *User = Use.getUser();
4661 if (Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(User))
4662 if (I->getParent() == CaseDest)
4663 continue;
4664 if (PHINode *Phi = dyn_cast<PHINode>(User))
4665 if (Phi->getIncomingBlock(Use) == CaseDest)
4666 continue;
4667 return false;
4668 }
4669
Florian Hahn3df88442018-04-30 20:10:53 +00004670 ConstantPool.insert(std::make_pair(&I, C));
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004671 } else {
4672 break;
4673 }
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004674 }
4675
4676 // If we did not have a CommonDest before, use the current one.
4677 if (!*CommonDest)
4678 *CommonDest = CaseDest;
4679 // If the destination isn't the common one, abort.
4680 if (CaseDest != *CommonDest)
4681 return false;
4682
4683 // Get the values for this case from phi nodes in the destination block.
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00004684 for (PHINode &PHI : (*CommonDest)->phis()) {
4685 int Idx = PHI.getBasicBlockIndex(Pred);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004686 if (Idx == -1)
4687 continue;
4688
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004689 Constant *ConstVal =
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00004690 LookupConstant(PHI.getIncomingValue(Idx), ConstantPool);
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004691 if (!ConstVal)
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004692 return false;
4693
4694 // Be conservative about which kinds of constants we support.
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004695 if (!ValidLookupTableConstant(ConstVal, TTI))
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004696 return false;
4697
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00004698 Res.push_back(std::make_pair(&PHI, ConstVal));
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004699 }
4700
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004701 return Res.size() > 0;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004702}
4703
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004704// Helper function used to add CaseVal to the list of cases that generate
Marcello Maggioni70834232018-01-11 02:01:16 +00004705// Result. Returns the updated number of cases that generate this result.
4706static uintptr_t MapCaseToResult(ConstantInt *CaseVal,
4707 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &UniqueResults,
4708 Constant *Result) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004709 for (auto &I : UniqueResults) {
4710 if (I.first == Result) {
4711 I.second.push_back(CaseVal);
Marcello Maggioni70834232018-01-11 02:01:16 +00004712 return I.second.size();
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004713 }
4714 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004715 UniqueResults.push_back(
4716 std::make_pair(Result, SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 4>(1, CaseVal)));
Marcello Maggioni70834232018-01-11 02:01:16 +00004717 return 1;
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004718}
4719
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004720// Helper function that initializes a map containing
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004721// results for the PHI node of the common destination block for a switch
4722// instruction. Returns false if multiple PHI nodes have been found or if
4723// there is not a common destination block for the switch.
Marcello Maggioni70834232018-01-11 02:01:16 +00004724static bool
4725InitializeUniqueCases(SwitchInst *SI, PHINode *&PHI, BasicBlock *&CommonDest,
4726 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &UniqueResults,
4727 Constant *&DefaultResult, const DataLayout &DL,
4728 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
4729 uintptr_t MaxUniqueResults, uintptr_t MaxCasesPerResult) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004730 for (auto &I : SI->cases()) {
4731 ConstantInt *CaseVal = I.getCaseValue();
4732
4733 // Resulting value at phi nodes for this case value.
4734 SwitchCaseResultsTy Results;
4735 if (!GetCaseResults(SI, CaseVal, I.getCaseSuccessor(), &CommonDest, Results,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004736 DL, TTI))
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004737 return false;
4738
Marcello Maggioniddccd502018-01-11 02:06:28 +00004739 // Only one value per case is permitted.
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004740 if (Results.size() > 1)
4741 return false;
Marcello Maggioni70834232018-01-11 02:01:16 +00004742
4743 // Add the case->result mapping to UniqueResults.
4744 const uintptr_t NumCasesForResult =
4745 MapCaseToResult(CaseVal, UniqueResults, Results.begin()->second);
4746
4747 // Early out if there are too many cases for this result.
4748 if (NumCasesForResult > MaxCasesPerResult)
4749 return false;
4750
4751 // Early out if there are too many unique results.
4752 if (UniqueResults.size() > MaxUniqueResults)
4753 return false;
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004754
4755 // Check the PHI consistency.
4756 if (!PHI)
4757 PHI = Results[0].first;
4758 else if (PHI != Results[0].first)
4759 return false;
4760 }
4761 // Find the default result value.
4762 SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 1> DefaultResults;
4763 BasicBlock *DefaultDest = SI->getDefaultDest();
4764 GetCaseResults(SI, nullptr, SI->getDefaultDest(), &CommonDest, DefaultResults,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004765 DL, TTI);
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004766 // If the default value is not found abort unless the default destination
4767 // is unreachable.
4768 DefaultResult =
4769 DefaultResults.size() == 1 ? DefaultResults.begin()->second : nullptr;
4770 if ((!DefaultResult &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004771 !isa<UnreachableInst>(DefaultDest->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg())))
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004772 return false;
4773
4774 return true;
4775}
4776
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004777// Helper function that checks if it is possible to transform a switch with only
4778// two cases (or two cases + default) that produces a result into a select.
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004779// Example:
4780// switch (a) {
4781// case 10: %0 = icmp eq i32 %a, 10
4782// return 10; %1 = select i1 %0, i32 10, i32 4
4783// case 20: ----> %2 = icmp eq i32 %a, 20
4784// return 2; %3 = select i1 %2, i32 2, i32 %1
4785// default:
4786// return 4;
4787// }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004788static Value *ConvertTwoCaseSwitch(const SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &ResultVector,
4789 Constant *DefaultResult, Value *Condition,
4790 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004791 assert(ResultVector.size() == 2 &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004792 "We should have exactly two unique results at this point");
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004793 // If we are selecting between only two cases transform into a simple
4794 // select or a two-way select if default is possible.
4795 if (ResultVector[0].second.size() == 1 &&
4796 ResultVector[1].second.size() == 1) {
4797 ConstantInt *const FirstCase = ResultVector[0].second[0];
4798 ConstantInt *const SecondCase = ResultVector[1].second[0];
4799
4800 bool DefaultCanTrigger = DefaultResult;
4801 Value *SelectValue = ResultVector[1].first;
4802 if (DefaultCanTrigger) {
4803 Value *const ValueCompare =
4804 Builder.CreateICmpEQ(Condition, SecondCase, "switch.selectcmp");
4805 SelectValue = Builder.CreateSelect(ValueCompare, ResultVector[1].first,
4806 DefaultResult, "switch.select");
4807 }
4808 Value *const ValueCompare =
4809 Builder.CreateICmpEQ(Condition, FirstCase, "switch.selectcmp");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004810 return Builder.CreateSelect(ValueCompare, ResultVector[0].first,
4811 SelectValue, "switch.select");
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004812 }
4813
4814 return nullptr;
4815}
4816
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004817// Helper function to cleanup a switch instruction that has been converted into
4818// a select, fixing up PHI nodes and basic blocks.
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004819static void RemoveSwitchAfterSelectConversion(SwitchInst *SI, PHINode *PHI,
4820 Value *SelectValue,
4821 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
4822 BasicBlock *SelectBB = SI->getParent();
4823 while (PHI->getBasicBlockIndex(SelectBB) >= 0)
4824 PHI->removeIncomingValue(SelectBB);
4825 PHI->addIncoming(SelectValue, SelectBB);
4826
4827 Builder.CreateBr(PHI->getParent());
4828
4829 // Remove the switch.
4830 for (unsigned i = 0, e = SI->getNumSuccessors(); i < e; ++i) {
4831 BasicBlock *Succ = SI->getSuccessor(i);
4832
4833 if (Succ == PHI->getParent())
4834 continue;
4835 Succ->removePredecessor(SelectBB);
4836 }
4837 SI->eraseFromParent();
4838}
4839
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004840/// If the switch is only used to initialize one or more
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004841/// phi nodes in a common successor block with only two different
4842/// constant values, replace the switch with select.
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00004843static bool switchToSelect(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
4844 const DataLayout &DL,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004845 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004846 Value *const Cond = SI->getCondition();
4847 PHINode *PHI = nullptr;
4848 BasicBlock *CommonDest = nullptr;
4849 Constant *DefaultResult;
4850 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy UniqueResults;
4851 // Collect all the cases that will deliver the same value from the switch.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004852 if (!InitializeUniqueCases(SI, PHI, CommonDest, UniqueResults, DefaultResult,
Marcello Maggioni70834232018-01-11 02:01:16 +00004853 DL, TTI, 2, 1))
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004854 return false;
4855 // Selects choose between maximum two values.
4856 if (UniqueResults.size() != 2)
4857 return false;
4858 assert(PHI != nullptr && "PHI for value select not found");
4859
4860 Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004861 Value *SelectValue =
4862 ConvertTwoCaseSwitch(UniqueResults, DefaultResult, Cond, Builder);
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004863 if (SelectValue) {
4864 RemoveSwitchAfterSelectConversion(SI, PHI, SelectValue, Builder);
4865 return true;
4866 }
4867 // The switch couldn't be converted into a select.
4868 return false;
4869}
4870
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004871namespace {
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00004872
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004873/// This class represents a lookup table that can be used to replace a switch.
4874class SwitchLookupTable {
4875public:
4876 /// Create a lookup table to use as a switch replacement with the contents
4877 /// of Values, using DefaultValue to fill any holes in the table.
4878 SwitchLookupTable(
4879 Module &M, uint64_t TableSize, ConstantInt *Offset,
4880 const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>> &Values,
Sumanth Gundapaneni5372f0a2017-06-30 20:00:01 +00004881 Constant *DefaultValue, const DataLayout &DL, const StringRef &FuncName);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004882
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004883 /// Build instructions with Builder to retrieve the value at
4884 /// the position given by Index in the lookup table.
4885 Value *BuildLookup(Value *Index, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004886
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004887 /// Return true if a table with TableSize elements of
4888 /// type ElementType would fit in a target-legal register.
4889 static bool WouldFitInRegister(const DataLayout &DL, uint64_t TableSize,
4890 Type *ElementType);
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004891
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004892private:
4893 // Depending on the contents of the table, it can be represented in
4894 // different ways.
4895 enum {
4896 // For tables where each element contains the same value, we just have to
4897 // store that single value and return it for each lookup.
4898 SingleValueKind,
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004899
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004900 // For tables where there is a linear relationship between table index
4901 // and values. We calculate the result with a simple multiplication
4902 // and addition instead of a table lookup.
4903 LinearMapKind,
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004904
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004905 // For small tables with integer elements, we can pack them into a bitmap
4906 // that fits into a target-legal register. Values are retrieved by
4907 // shift and mask operations.
4908 BitMapKind,
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004909
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004910 // The table is stored as an array of values. Values are retrieved by load
4911 // instructions from the table.
4912 ArrayKind
4913 } Kind;
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004914
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004915 // For SingleValueKind, this is the single value.
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00004916 Constant *SingleValue = nullptr;
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004917
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004918 // For BitMapKind, this is the bitmap.
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00004919 ConstantInt *BitMap = nullptr;
4920 IntegerType *BitMapElementTy = nullptr;
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004921
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004922 // For LinearMapKind, these are the constants used to derive the value.
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00004923 ConstantInt *LinearOffset = nullptr;
4924 ConstantInt *LinearMultiplier = nullptr;
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004925
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004926 // For ArrayKind, this is the array.
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00004927 GlobalVariable *Array = nullptr;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004928};
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00004929
4930} // end anonymous namespace
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004931
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004932SwitchLookupTable::SwitchLookupTable(
4933 Module &M, uint64_t TableSize, ConstantInt *Offset,
4934 const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>> &Values,
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00004935 Constant *DefaultValue, const DataLayout &DL, const StringRef &FuncName) {
Hans Wennborgf2e2c102012-09-26 11:07:37 +00004936 assert(Values.size() && "Can't build lookup table without values!");
4937 assert(TableSize >= Values.size() && "Can't fit values in table!");
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004938
4939 // If all values in the table are equal, this is that value.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004940 SingleValue = Values.begin()->second;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004941
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004942 Type *ValueType = Values.begin()->second->getType();
4943
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004944 // Build up the table contents.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004945 SmallVector<Constant *, 64> TableContents(TableSize);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004946 for (size_t I = 0, E = Values.size(); I != E; ++I) {
4947 ConstantInt *CaseVal = Values[I].first;
4948 Constant *CaseRes = Values[I].second;
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004949 assert(CaseRes->getType() == ValueType);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004950
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004951 uint64_t Idx = (CaseVal->getValue() - Offset->getValue()).getLimitedValue();
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004952 TableContents[Idx] = CaseRes;
4953
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004954 if (CaseRes != SingleValue)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004955 SingleValue = nullptr;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004956 }
4957
4958 // Fill in any holes in the table with the default result.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004959 if (Values.size() < TableSize) {
Marcello Maggioni89c05ad2014-07-03 08:29:06 +00004960 assert(DefaultValue &&
4961 "Need a default value to fill the lookup table holes.");
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004962 assert(DefaultValue->getType() == ValueType);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004963 for (uint64_t I = 0; I < TableSize; ++I) {
4964 if (!TableContents[I])
4965 TableContents[I] = DefaultValue;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004966 }
4967
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004968 if (DefaultValue != SingleValue)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004969 SingleValue = nullptr;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004970 }
4971
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004972 // If each element in the table contains the same value, we only need to store
4973 // that single value.
4974 if (SingleValue) {
4975 Kind = SingleValueKind;
4976 return;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004977 }
4978
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004979 // Check if we can derive the value with a linear transformation from the
4980 // table index.
4981 if (isa<IntegerType>(ValueType)) {
4982 bool LinearMappingPossible = true;
4983 APInt PrevVal;
4984 APInt DistToPrev;
4985 assert(TableSize >= 2 && "Should be a SingleValue table.");
4986 // Check if there is the same distance between two consecutive values.
4987 for (uint64_t I = 0; I < TableSize; ++I) {
4988 ConstantInt *ConstVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[I]);
4989 if (!ConstVal) {
4990 // This is an undef. We could deal with it, but undefs in lookup tables
4991 // are very seldom. It's probably not worth the additional complexity.
4992 LinearMappingPossible = false;
4993 break;
4994 }
Craig Toppere777fed2017-05-22 00:49:35 +00004995 const APInt &Val = ConstVal->getValue();
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004996 if (I != 0) {
4997 APInt Dist = Val - PrevVal;
4998 if (I == 1) {
4999 DistToPrev = Dist;
5000 } else if (Dist != DistToPrev) {
5001 LinearMappingPossible = false;
5002 break;
5003 }
5004 }
5005 PrevVal = Val;
5006 }
5007 if (LinearMappingPossible) {
5008 LinearOffset = cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[0]);
5009 LinearMultiplier = ConstantInt::get(M.getContext(), DistToPrev);
5010 Kind = LinearMapKind;
5011 ++NumLinearMaps;
5012 return;
5013 }
5014 }
5015
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005016 // If the type is integer and the table fits in a register, build a bitmap.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00005017 if (WouldFitInRegister(DL, TableSize, ValueType)) {
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00005018 IntegerType *IT = cast<IntegerType>(ValueType);
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005019 APInt TableInt(TableSize * IT->getBitWidth(), 0);
5020 for (uint64_t I = TableSize; I > 0; --I) {
5021 TableInt <<= IT->getBitWidth();
Benjamin Kramer9fc3dc72012-10-01 11:31:48 +00005022 // Insert values into the bitmap. Undef values are set to zero.
5023 if (!isa<UndefValue>(TableContents[I - 1])) {
5024 ConstantInt *Val = cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[I - 1]);
5025 TableInt |= Val->getValue().zext(TableInt.getBitWidth());
5026 }
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005027 }
5028 BitMap = ConstantInt::get(M.getContext(), TableInt);
5029 BitMapElementTy = IT;
5030 Kind = BitMapKind;
5031 ++NumBitMaps;
5032 return;
5033 }
5034
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005035 // Store the table in an array.
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00005036 ArrayType *ArrayTy = ArrayType::get(ValueType, TableSize);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005037 Constant *Initializer = ConstantArray::get(ArrayTy, TableContents);
5038
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005039 Array = new GlobalVariable(M, ArrayTy, /*constant=*/true,
5040 GlobalVariable::PrivateLinkage, Initializer,
Sumanth Gundapaneni5372f0a2017-06-30 20:00:01 +00005041 "switch.table." + FuncName);
Peter Collingbourne96efdd62016-06-14 21:01:22 +00005042 Array->setUnnamedAddr(GlobalValue::UnnamedAddr::Global);
David Green2352b302018-09-12 09:54:17 +00005043 // Set the alignment to that of an array items. We will be only loading one
5044 // value out of it.
5045 Array->setAlignment(DL.getPrefTypeAlignment(ValueType));
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005046 Kind = ArrayKind;
5047}
5048
Manman Ren4d189fb2014-07-24 21:13:20 +00005049Value *SwitchLookupTable::BuildLookup(Value *Index, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005050 switch (Kind) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005051 case SingleValueKind:
5052 return SingleValue;
5053 case LinearMapKind: {
5054 // Derive the result value from the input value.
5055 Value *Result = Builder.CreateIntCast(Index, LinearMultiplier->getType(),
5056 false, "switch.idx.cast");
5057 if (!LinearMultiplier->isOne())
5058 Result = Builder.CreateMul(Result, LinearMultiplier, "switch.idx.mult");
5059 if (!LinearOffset->isZero())
5060 Result = Builder.CreateAdd(Result, LinearOffset, "switch.offset");
5061 return Result;
5062 }
5063 case BitMapKind: {
5064 // Type of the bitmap (e.g. i59).
5065 IntegerType *MapTy = BitMap->getType();
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005066
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005067 // Cast Index to the same type as the bitmap.
5068 // Note: The Index is <= the number of elements in the table, so
5069 // truncating it to the width of the bitmask is safe.
5070 Value *ShiftAmt = Builder.CreateZExtOrTrunc(Index, MapTy, "switch.cast");
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005071
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005072 // Multiply the shift amount by the element width.
5073 ShiftAmt = Builder.CreateMul(
5074 ShiftAmt, ConstantInt::get(MapTy, BitMapElementTy->getBitWidth()),
5075 "switch.shiftamt");
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005076
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005077 // Shift down.
5078 Value *DownShifted =
5079 Builder.CreateLShr(BitMap, ShiftAmt, "switch.downshift");
5080 // Mask off.
5081 return Builder.CreateTrunc(DownShifted, BitMapElementTy, "switch.masked");
5082 }
5083 case ArrayKind: {
5084 // Make sure the table index will not overflow when treated as signed.
5085 IntegerType *IT = cast<IntegerType>(Index->getType());
5086 uint64_t TableSize =
5087 Array->getInitializer()->getType()->getArrayNumElements();
5088 if (TableSize > (1ULL << (IT->getBitWidth() - 1)))
5089 Index = Builder.CreateZExt(
5090 Index, IntegerType::get(IT->getContext(), IT->getBitWidth() + 1),
5091 "switch.tableidx.zext");
Manman Renedc60372014-07-23 23:13:23 +00005092
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005093 Value *GEPIndices[] = {Builder.getInt32(0), Index};
5094 Value *GEP = Builder.CreateInBoundsGEP(Array->getValueType(), Array,
5095 GEPIndices, "switch.gep");
5096 return Builder.CreateLoad(GEP, "switch.load");
5097 }
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005098 }
5099 llvm_unreachable("Unknown lookup table kind!");
5100}
5101
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005102bool SwitchLookupTable::WouldFitInRegister(const DataLayout &DL,
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005103 uint64_t TableSize,
Craig Toppere3dcce92015-08-01 22:20:21 +00005104 Type *ElementType) {
5105 auto *IT = dyn_cast<IntegerType>(ElementType);
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005106 if (!IT)
5107 return false;
5108 // FIXME: If the type is wider than it needs to be, e.g. i8 but all values
5109 // are <= 15, we could try to narrow the type.
Benjamin Kramerc2081d12012-09-27 18:29:58 +00005110
5111 // Avoid overflow, fitsInLegalInteger uses unsigned int for the width.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005112 if (TableSize >= UINT_MAX / IT->getBitWidth())
Benjamin Kramerc2081d12012-09-27 18:29:58 +00005113 return false;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005114 return DL.fitsInLegalInteger(TableSize * IT->getBitWidth());
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005115}
5116
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00005117/// Determine whether a lookup table should be built for this switch, based on
5118/// the number of cases, size of the table, and the types of the results.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005119static bool
5120ShouldBuildLookupTable(SwitchInst *SI, uint64_t TableSize,
5121 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, const DataLayout &DL,
5122 const SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, Type *> &ResultTypes) {
Hans Wennborgf2e2c102012-09-26 11:07:37 +00005123 if (SI->getNumCases() > TableSize || TableSize >= UINT64_MAX / 10)
5124 return false; // TableSize overflowed, or mul below might overflow.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005125
Chandler Carruth77d433d2012-11-30 09:26:25 +00005126 bool AllTablesFitInRegister = true;
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00005127 bool HasIllegalType = false;
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00005128 for (const auto &I : ResultTypes) {
5129 Type *Ty = I.second;
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00005130
5131 // Saturate this flag to true.
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00005132 HasIllegalType = HasIllegalType || !TTI.isTypeLegal(Ty);
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00005133
5134 // Saturate this flag to false.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005135 AllTablesFitInRegister =
5136 AllTablesFitInRegister &&
5137 SwitchLookupTable::WouldFitInRegister(DL, TableSize, Ty);
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00005138
5139 // If both flags saturate, we're done. NOTE: This *only* works with
5140 // saturating flags, and all flags have to saturate first due to the
5141 // non-deterministic behavior of iterating over a dense map.
5142 if (HasIllegalType && !AllTablesFitInRegister)
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00005143 break;
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005144 }
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00005145
Chandler Carruth77d433d2012-11-30 09:26:25 +00005146 // If each table would fit in a register, we should build it anyway.
5147 if (AllTablesFitInRegister)
5148 return true;
5149
5150 // Don't build a table that doesn't fit in-register if it has illegal types.
5151 if (HasIllegalType)
5152 return false;
5153
5154 // The table density should be at least 40%. This is the same criterion as for
5155 // jump tables, see SelectionDAGBuilder::handleJTSwitchCase.
5156 // FIXME: Find the best cut-off.
5157 return SI->getNumCases() * 10 >= TableSize * 4;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005158}
5159
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005160/// Try to reuse the switch table index compare. Following pattern:
5161/// \code
5162/// if (idx < tablesize)
5163/// r = table[idx]; // table does not contain default_value
5164/// else
5165/// r = default_value;
5166/// if (r != default_value)
5167/// ...
5168/// \endcode
5169/// Is optimized to:
5170/// \code
5171/// cond = idx < tablesize;
5172/// if (cond)
5173/// r = table[idx];
5174/// else
5175/// r = default_value;
5176/// if (cond)
5177/// ...
5178/// \endcode
5179/// Jump threading will then eliminate the second if(cond).
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005180static void reuseTableCompare(
5181 User *PhiUser, BasicBlock *PhiBlock, BranchInst *RangeCheckBranch,
5182 Constant *DefaultValue,
5183 const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>> &Values) {
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005184 ICmpInst *CmpInst = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(PhiUser);
5185 if (!CmpInst)
5186 return;
5187
5188 // We require that the compare is in the same block as the phi so that jump
5189 // threading can do its work afterwards.
5190 if (CmpInst->getParent() != PhiBlock)
5191 return;
5192
5193 Constant *CmpOp1 = dyn_cast<Constant>(CmpInst->getOperand(1));
5194 if (!CmpOp1)
5195 return;
5196
5197 Value *RangeCmp = RangeCheckBranch->getCondition();
5198 Constant *TrueConst = ConstantInt::getTrue(RangeCmp->getType());
5199 Constant *FalseConst = ConstantInt::getFalse(RangeCmp->getType());
5200
5201 // Check if the compare with the default value is constant true or false.
5202 Constant *DefaultConst = ConstantExpr::getICmp(CmpInst->getPredicate(),
5203 DefaultValue, CmpOp1, true);
5204 if (DefaultConst != TrueConst && DefaultConst != FalseConst)
5205 return;
5206
5207 // Check if the compare with the case values is distinct from the default
5208 // compare result.
5209 for (auto ValuePair : Values) {
5210 Constant *CaseConst = ConstantExpr::getICmp(CmpInst->getPredicate(),
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005211 ValuePair.second, CmpOp1, true);
Mikael Holmen0a3e9802017-12-05 14:14:00 +00005212 if (!CaseConst || CaseConst == DefaultConst || isa<UndefValue>(CaseConst))
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005213 return;
5214 assert((CaseConst == TrueConst || CaseConst == FalseConst) &&
5215 "Expect true or false as compare result.");
5216 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005217
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005218 // Check if the branch instruction dominates the phi node. It's a simple
5219 // dominance check, but sufficient for our needs.
5220 // Although this check is invariant in the calling loops, it's better to do it
5221 // at this late stage. Practically we do it at most once for a switch.
5222 BasicBlock *BranchBlock = RangeCheckBranch->getParent();
5223 for (auto PI = pred_begin(PhiBlock), E = pred_end(PhiBlock); PI != E; ++PI) {
5224 BasicBlock *Pred = *PI;
5225 if (Pred != BranchBlock && Pred->getUniquePredecessor() != BranchBlock)
5226 return;
5227 }
5228
5229 if (DefaultConst == FalseConst) {
5230 // The compare yields the same result. We can replace it.
5231 CmpInst->replaceAllUsesWith(RangeCmp);
5232 ++NumTableCmpReuses;
5233 } else {
5234 // The compare yields the same result, just inverted. We can replace it.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005235 Value *InvertedTableCmp = BinaryOperator::CreateXor(
5236 RangeCmp, ConstantInt::get(RangeCmp->getType(), 1), "inverted.cmp",
5237 RangeCheckBranch);
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005238 CmpInst->replaceAllUsesWith(InvertedTableCmp);
5239 ++NumTableCmpReuses;
5240 }
5241}
5242
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00005243/// If the switch is only used to initialize one or more phi nodes in a common
5244/// successor block with different constant values, replace the switch with
5245/// lookup tables.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005246static bool SwitchToLookupTable(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
5247 const DataLayout &DL,
5248 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005249 assert(SI->getNumCases() > 1 && "Degenerate switch?");
Hans Wennborgf3254832012-10-30 11:23:25 +00005250
Sumanth Gundapaneni8d50a502017-07-28 22:25:40 +00005251 Function *Fn = SI->getParent()->getParent();
5252 // Only build lookup table when we have a target that supports it or the
5253 // attribute is not set.
5254 if (!TTI.shouldBuildLookupTables() ||
5255 (Fn->getFnAttribute("no-jump-tables").getValueAsString() == "true"))
Hans Wennborgf3254832012-10-30 11:23:25 +00005256 return false;
5257
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005258 // FIXME: If the switch is too sparse for a lookup table, perhaps we could
5259 // split off a dense part and build a lookup table for that.
5260
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005261 // FIXME: This creates arrays of GEPs to constant strings, which means each
5262 // GEP needs a runtime relocation in PIC code. We should just build one big
5263 // string and lookup indices into that.
5264
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005265 // Ignore switches with less than three cases. Lookup tables will not make
Sanjay Patelca146972017-09-19 20:58:14 +00005266 // them faster, so we don't analyze them.
Hans Wennborg4744ac12014-01-15 05:00:27 +00005267 if (SI->getNumCases() < 3)
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005268 return false;
5269
5270 // Figure out the corresponding result for each case value and phi node in the
Eric Christopher572e03a2015-06-19 01:53:21 +00005271 // common destination, as well as the min and max case values.
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005272 assert(SI->case_begin() != SI->case_end());
5273 SwitchInst::CaseIt CI = SI->case_begin();
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00005274 ConstantInt *MinCaseVal = CI->getCaseValue();
5275 ConstantInt *MaxCaseVal = CI->getCaseValue();
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005276
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00005277 BasicBlock *CommonDest = nullptr;
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00005278
5279 using ResultListTy = SmallVector<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>, 4>;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005280 SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, ResultListTy> ResultLists;
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00005281
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005282 SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, Constant *> DefaultResults;
5283 SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, Type *> ResultTypes;
5284 SmallVector<PHINode *, 4> PHIs;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005285
5286 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt E = SI->case_end(); CI != E; ++CI) {
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00005287 ConstantInt *CaseVal = CI->getCaseValue();
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005288 if (CaseVal->getValue().slt(MinCaseVal->getValue()))
5289 MinCaseVal = CaseVal;
5290 if (CaseVal->getValue().sgt(MaxCaseVal->getValue()))
5291 MaxCaseVal = CaseVal;
5292
5293 // Resulting value at phi nodes for this case value.
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00005294 using ResultsTy = SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 4>;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005295 ResultsTy Results;
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00005296 if (!GetCaseResults(SI, CaseVal, CI->getCaseSuccessor(), &CommonDest,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00005297 Results, DL, TTI))
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005298 return false;
5299
5300 // Append the result from this case to the list for each phi.
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00005301 for (const auto &I : Results) {
5302 PHINode *PHI = I.first;
5303 Constant *Value = I.second;
5304 if (!ResultLists.count(PHI))
5305 PHIs.push_back(PHI);
5306 ResultLists[PHI].push_back(std::make_pair(CaseVal, Value));
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005307 }
5308 }
5309
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00005310 // Keep track of the result types.
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00005311 for (PHINode *PHI : PHIs) {
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00005312 ResultTypes[PHI] = ResultLists[PHI][0].second->getType();
5313 }
5314
5315 uint64_t NumResults = ResultLists[PHIs[0]].size();
5316 APInt RangeSpread = MaxCaseVal->getValue() - MinCaseVal->getValue();
5317 uint64_t TableSize = RangeSpread.getLimitedValue() + 1;
5318 bool TableHasHoles = (NumResults < TableSize);
5319
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005320 // If the table has holes, we need a constant result for the default case
5321 // or a bitmask that fits in a register.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005322 SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 4> DefaultResultsList;
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00005323 bool HasDefaultResults =
5324 GetCaseResults(SI, nullptr, SI->getDefaultDest(), &CommonDest,
5325 DefaultResultsList, DL, TTI);
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00005326
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005327 bool NeedMask = (TableHasHoles && !HasDefaultResults);
5328 if (NeedMask) {
5329 // As an extra penalty for the validity test we require more cases.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005330 if (SI->getNumCases() < 4) // FIXME: Find best threshold value (benchmark).
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005331 return false;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005332 if (!DL.fitsInLegalInteger(TableSize))
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005333 return false;
5334 }
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00005335
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00005336 for (const auto &I : DefaultResultsList) {
5337 PHINode *PHI = I.first;
5338 Constant *Result = I.second;
Hans Wennborg7fd5c8442012-09-10 07:44:22 +00005339 DefaultResults[PHI] = Result;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005340 }
5341
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00005342 if (!ShouldBuildLookupTable(SI, TableSize, TTI, DL, ResultTypes))
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005343 return false;
5344
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005345 // Create the BB that does the lookups.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005346 Module &Mod = *CommonDest->getParent()->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005347 BasicBlock *LookupBB = BasicBlock::Create(
5348 Mod.getContext(), "switch.lookup", CommonDest->getParent(), CommonDest);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005349
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005350 // Compute the table index value.
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005351 Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
Sanjay Patel73811a12017-09-20 22:31:35 +00005352 Value *TableIndex;
5353 if (MinCaseVal->isNullValue())
5354 TableIndex = SI->getCondition();
5355 else
5356 TableIndex = Builder.CreateSub(SI->getCondition(), MinCaseVal,
5357 "switch.tableidx");
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005358
5359 // Compute the maximum table size representable by the integer type we are
5360 // switching upon.
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00005361 unsigned CaseSize = MinCaseVal->getType()->getPrimitiveSizeInBits();
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00005362 uint64_t MaxTableSize = CaseSize > 63 ? UINT64_MAX : 1ULL << CaseSize;
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005363 assert(MaxTableSize >= TableSize &&
5364 "It is impossible for a switch to have more entries than the max "
5365 "representable value of its input integer type's size.");
5366
Hans Wennborgb64cb272015-01-26 19:52:34 +00005367 // If the default destination is unreachable, or if the lookup table covers
5368 // all values of the conditional variable, branch directly to the lookup table
5369 // BB. Otherwise, check that the condition is within the case range.
5370 const bool DefaultIsReachable =
5371 !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
5372 const bool GeneratingCoveredLookupTable = (MaxTableSize == TableSize);
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005373 BranchInst *RangeCheckBranch = nullptr;
5374
Hans Wennborgb64cb272015-01-26 19:52:34 +00005375 if (!DefaultIsReachable || GeneratingCoveredLookupTable) {
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005376 Builder.CreateBr(LookupBB);
Hans Wennborg86ac6302015-04-24 20:57:56 +00005377 // Note: We call removeProdecessor later since we need to be able to get the
5378 // PHI value for the default case in case we're using a bit mask.
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005379 } else {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005380 Value *Cmp = Builder.CreateICmpULT(
5381 TableIndex, ConstantInt::get(MinCaseVal->getType(), TableSize));
5382 RangeCheckBranch =
5383 Builder.CreateCondBr(Cmp, LookupBB, SI->getDefaultDest());
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005384 }
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005385
5386 // Populate the BB that does the lookups.
5387 Builder.SetInsertPoint(LookupBB);
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005388
5389 if (NeedMask) {
Sanjay Patelca146972017-09-19 20:58:14 +00005390 // Before doing the lookup, we do the hole check. The LookupBB is therefore
5391 // re-purposed to do the hole check, and we create a new LookupBB.
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005392 BasicBlock *MaskBB = LookupBB;
5393 MaskBB->setName("switch.hole_check");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005394 LookupBB = BasicBlock::Create(Mod.getContext(), "switch.lookup",
5395 CommonDest->getParent(), CommonDest);
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005396
Sanjay Patelca146972017-09-19 20:58:14 +00005397 // Make the mask's bitwidth at least 8-bit and a power-of-2 to avoid
Juergen Ributzkac9591e92014-11-17 19:39:56 +00005398 // unnecessary illegal types.
5399 uint64_t TableSizePowOf2 = NextPowerOf2(std::max(7ULL, TableSize - 1ULL));
5400 APInt MaskInt(TableSizePowOf2, 0);
5401 APInt One(TableSizePowOf2, 1);
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005402 // Build bitmask; fill in a 1 bit for every case.
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005403 const ResultListTy &ResultList = ResultLists[PHIs[0]];
5404 for (size_t I = 0, E = ResultList.size(); I != E; ++I) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005405 uint64_t Idx = (ResultList[I].first->getValue() - MinCaseVal->getValue())
5406 .getLimitedValue();
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005407 MaskInt |= One << Idx;
5408 }
5409 ConstantInt *TableMask = ConstantInt::get(Mod.getContext(), MaskInt);
5410
5411 // Get the TableIndex'th bit of the bitmask.
5412 // If this bit is 0 (meaning hole) jump to the default destination,
5413 // else continue with table lookup.
5414 IntegerType *MapTy = TableMask->getType();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005415 Value *MaskIndex =
5416 Builder.CreateZExtOrTrunc(TableIndex, MapTy, "switch.maskindex");
5417 Value *Shifted = Builder.CreateLShr(TableMask, MaskIndex, "switch.shifted");
5418 Value *LoBit = Builder.CreateTrunc(
5419 Shifted, Type::getInt1Ty(Mod.getContext()), "switch.lobit");
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005420 Builder.CreateCondBr(LoBit, LookupBB, SI->getDefaultDest());
5421
5422 Builder.SetInsertPoint(LookupBB);
5423 AddPredecessorToBlock(SI->getDefaultDest(), MaskBB, SI->getParent());
5424 }
5425
Hans Wennborg86ac6302015-04-24 20:57:56 +00005426 if (!DefaultIsReachable || GeneratingCoveredLookupTable) {
Sanjay Patelca146972017-09-19 20:58:14 +00005427 // We cached PHINodes in PHIs. To avoid accessing deleted PHINodes later,
Hans Wennborg86ac6302015-04-24 20:57:56 +00005428 // do not delete PHINodes here.
5429 SI->getDefaultDest()->removePredecessor(SI->getParent(),
5430 /*DontDeleteUselessPHIs=*/true);
5431 }
5432
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005433 bool ReturnedEarly = false;
George Burgess IVf9d26af2018-05-05 04:52:26 +00005434 for (PHINode *PHI : PHIs) {
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005435 const ResultListTy &ResultList = ResultLists[PHI];
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005436
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005437 // If using a bitmask, use any value to fill the lookup table holes.
5438 Constant *DV = NeedMask ? ResultLists[PHI][0].second : DefaultResults[PHI];
Sumanth Gundapaneni8d50a502017-07-28 22:25:40 +00005439 StringRef FuncName = Fn->getName();
Sumanth Gundapaneni5372f0a2017-06-30 20:00:01 +00005440 SwitchLookupTable Table(Mod, TableSize, MinCaseVal, ResultList, DV, DL,
5441 FuncName);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005442
Manman Ren4d189fb2014-07-24 21:13:20 +00005443 Value *Result = Table.BuildLookup(TableIndex, Builder);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005444
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00005445 // If the result is used to return immediately from the function, we want to
5446 // do that right here.
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00005447 if (PHI->hasOneUse() && isa<ReturnInst>(*PHI->user_begin()) &&
5448 PHI->user_back() == CommonDest->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()) {
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00005449 Builder.CreateRet(Result);
5450 ReturnedEarly = true;
5451 break;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005452 }
5453
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005454 // Do a small peephole optimization: re-use the switch table compare if
5455 // possible.
5456 if (!TableHasHoles && HasDefaultResults && RangeCheckBranch) {
5457 BasicBlock *PhiBlock = PHI->getParent();
5458 // Search for compare instructions which use the phi.
5459 for (auto *User : PHI->users()) {
5460 reuseTableCompare(User, PhiBlock, RangeCheckBranch, DV, ResultList);
5461 }
5462 }
5463
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00005464 PHI->addIncoming(Result, LookupBB);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005465 }
5466
5467 if (!ReturnedEarly)
5468 Builder.CreateBr(CommonDest);
5469
5470 // Remove the switch.
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00005471 for (unsigned i = 0, e = SI->getNumSuccessors(); i < e; ++i) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005472 BasicBlock *Succ = SI->getSuccessor(i);
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005473
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00005474 if (Succ == SI->getDefaultDest())
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005475 continue;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005476 Succ->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
5477 }
5478 SI->eraseFromParent();
5479
5480 ++NumLookupTables;
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005481 if (NeedMask)
5482 ++NumLookupTablesHoles;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005483 return true;
5484}
5485
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005486static bool isSwitchDense(ArrayRef<int64_t> Values) {
5487 // See also SelectionDAGBuilder::isDense(), which this function was based on.
5488 uint64_t Diff = (uint64_t)Values.back() - (uint64_t)Values.front();
5489 uint64_t Range = Diff + 1;
5490 uint64_t NumCases = Values.size();
5491 // 40% is the default density for building a jump table in optsize/minsize mode.
5492 uint64_t MinDensity = 40;
Junmo Parkdb8f6ee2016-08-02 04:38:27 +00005493
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005494 return NumCases * 100 >= Range * MinDensity;
5495}
5496
Sanjay Patelca146972017-09-19 20:58:14 +00005497/// Try to transform a switch that has "holes" in it to a contiguous sequence
5498/// of cases.
5499///
5500/// A switch such as: switch(i) {case 5: case 9: case 13: case 17:} can be
5501/// range-reduced to: switch ((i-5) / 4) {case 0: case 1: case 2: case 3:}.
5502///
5503/// This converts a sparse switch into a dense switch which allows better
5504/// lowering and could also allow transforming into a lookup table.
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005505static bool ReduceSwitchRange(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
5506 const DataLayout &DL,
5507 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
5508 auto *CondTy = cast<IntegerType>(SI->getCondition()->getType());
5509 if (CondTy->getIntegerBitWidth() > 64 ||
5510 !DL.fitsInLegalInteger(CondTy->getIntegerBitWidth()))
5511 return false;
5512 // Only bother with this optimization if there are more than 3 switch cases;
5513 // SDAG will only bother creating jump tables for 4 or more cases.
5514 if (SI->getNumCases() < 4)
5515 return false;
5516
5517 // This transform is agnostic to the signedness of the input or case values. We
5518 // can treat the case values as signed or unsigned. We can optimize more common
5519 // cases such as a sequence crossing zero {-4,0,4,8} if we interpret case values
5520 // as signed.
5521 SmallVector<int64_t,4> Values;
5522 for (auto &C : SI->cases())
5523 Values.push_back(C.getCaseValue()->getValue().getSExtValue());
Mandeep Singh Grang636d94d2018-04-13 19:47:57 +00005524 llvm::sort(Values.begin(), Values.end());
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005525
5526 // If the switch is already dense, there's nothing useful to do here.
5527 if (isSwitchDense(Values))
5528 return false;
5529
5530 // First, transform the values such that they start at zero and ascend.
5531 int64_t Base = Values[0];
5532 for (auto &V : Values)
Vitaly Buka524c0a62017-10-17 18:33:15 +00005533 V -= (uint64_t)(Base);
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005534
5535 // Now we have signed numbers that have been shifted so that, given enough
5536 // precision, there are no negative values. Since the rest of the transform
5537 // is bitwise only, we switch now to an unsigned representation.
5538 uint64_t GCD = 0;
5539 for (auto &V : Values)
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00005540 GCD = GreatestCommonDivisor64(GCD, (uint64_t)V);
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005541
5542 // This transform can be done speculatively because it is so cheap - it results
5543 // in a single rotate operation being inserted. This can only happen if the
5544 // factor extracted is a power of 2.
5545 // FIXME: If the GCD is an odd number we can multiply by the multiplicative
5546 // inverse of GCD and then perform this transform.
5547 // FIXME: It's possible that optimizing a switch on powers of two might also
5548 // be beneficial - flag values are often powers of two and we could use a CLZ
5549 // as the key function.
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00005550 if (GCD <= 1 || !isPowerOf2_64(GCD))
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005551 // No common divisor found or too expensive to compute key function.
5552 return false;
5553
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00005554 unsigned Shift = Log2_64(GCD);
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005555 for (auto &V : Values)
5556 V = (int64_t)((uint64_t)V >> Shift);
5557
5558 if (!isSwitchDense(Values))
5559 // Transform didn't create a dense switch.
5560 return false;
5561
5562 // The obvious transform is to shift the switch condition right and emit a
5563 // check that the condition actually cleanly divided by GCD, i.e.
5564 // C & (1 << Shift - 1) == 0
5565 // inserting a new CFG edge to handle the case where it didn't divide cleanly.
5566 //
5567 // A cheaper way of doing this is a simple ROTR(C, Shift). This performs the
5568 // shift and puts the shifted-off bits in the uppermost bits. If any of these
5569 // are nonzero then the switch condition will be very large and will hit the
5570 // default case.
Junmo Parkdb8f6ee2016-08-02 04:38:27 +00005571
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005572 auto *Ty = cast<IntegerType>(SI->getCondition()->getType());
5573 Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
5574 auto *ShiftC = ConstantInt::get(Ty, Shift);
5575 auto *Sub = Builder.CreateSub(SI->getCondition(), ConstantInt::get(Ty, Base));
Benjamin Krameraa160c22016-08-05 14:55:02 +00005576 auto *LShr = Builder.CreateLShr(Sub, ShiftC);
5577 auto *Shl = Builder.CreateShl(Sub, Ty->getBitWidth() - Shift);
5578 auto *Rot = Builder.CreateOr(LShr, Shl);
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005579 SI->replaceUsesOfWith(SI->getCondition(), Rot);
5580
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00005581 for (auto Case : SI->cases()) {
5582 auto *Orig = Case.getCaseValue();
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005583 auto Sub = Orig->getValue() - APInt(Ty->getBitWidth(), Base);
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00005584 Case.setValue(
James Molloybade86c2016-08-01 09:34:48 +00005585 cast<ConstantInt>(ConstantInt::get(Ty, Sub.lshr(ShiftC->getValue()))));
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005586 }
5587 return true;
5588}
5589
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005590bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifySwitch(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005591 BasicBlock *BB = SI->getParent();
5592
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00005593 if (isValueEqualityComparison(SI)) {
5594 // If we only have one predecessor, and if it is a branch on this value,
5595 // see if that predecessor totally determines the outcome of this switch.
5596 if (BasicBlock *OnlyPred = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
5597 if (SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(SI, OnlyPred, Builder))
Justin Bogner6f1740d2018-08-20 06:37:11 +00005598 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) || true;
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00005599
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00005600 Value *Cond = SI->getCondition();
5601 if (SelectInst *Select = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(Cond))
5602 if (SimplifySwitchOnSelect(SI, Select))
Justin Bogner6f1740d2018-08-20 06:37:11 +00005603 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) || true;
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00005604
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00005605 // If the block only contains the switch, see if we can fold the block
5606 // away into any preds.
Florian Hahn3df88442018-04-30 20:10:53 +00005607 if (SI == &*BB->instructionsWithoutDebug().begin())
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00005608 if (FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(SI, Builder))
Justin Bogner6f1740d2018-08-20 06:37:11 +00005609 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) || true;
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00005610 }
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00005611
5612 // Try to transform the switch into an icmp and a branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005613 if (TurnSwitchRangeIntoICmp(SI, Builder))
Justin Bogner6f1740d2018-08-20 06:37:11 +00005614 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) || true;
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00005615
5616 // Remove unreachable cases.
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005617 if (eliminateDeadSwitchCases(SI, Options.AC, DL))
Justin Bogner6f1740d2018-08-20 06:37:11 +00005618 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) || true;
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00005619
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005620 if (switchToSelect(SI, Builder, DL, TTI))
Justin Bogner6f1740d2018-08-20 06:37:11 +00005621 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) || true;
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00005622
Sanjay Patelb80daf02017-10-22 19:10:07 +00005623 if (Options.ForwardSwitchCondToPhi && ForwardSwitchConditionToPHI(SI))
Justin Bogner6f1740d2018-08-20 06:37:11 +00005624 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) || true;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00005625
Sanjay Patelca146972017-09-19 20:58:14 +00005626 // The conversion from switch to lookup tables results in difficult-to-analyze
5627 // code and makes pruning branches much harder. This is a problem if the
5628 // switch expression itself can still be restricted as a result of inlining or
5629 // CVP. Therefore, only apply this transformation during late stages of the
5630 // optimisation pipeline.
Sanjay Patel0f9b4772017-09-27 14:54:16 +00005631 if (Options.ConvertSwitchToLookupTable &&
5632 SwitchToLookupTable(SI, Builder, DL, TTI))
Justin Bogner6f1740d2018-08-20 06:37:11 +00005633 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) || true;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005634
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005635 if (ReduceSwitchRange(SI, Builder, DL, TTI))
Justin Bogner6f1740d2018-08-20 06:37:11 +00005636 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) || true;
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005637
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005638 return false;
5639}
5640
5641bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyIndirectBr(IndirectBrInst *IBI) {
5642 BasicBlock *BB = IBI->getParent();
5643 bool Changed = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005644
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005645 // Eliminate redundant destinations.
5646 SmallPtrSet<Value *, 8> Succs;
5647 for (unsigned i = 0, e = IBI->getNumDestinations(); i != e; ++i) {
5648 BasicBlock *Dest = IBI->getDestination(i);
David Blaikie70573dc2014-11-19 07:49:26 +00005649 if (!Dest->hasAddressTaken() || !Succs.insert(Dest).second) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005650 Dest->removePredecessor(BB);
5651 IBI->removeDestination(i);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005652 --i;
5653 --e;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005654 Changed = true;
5655 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005656 }
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005657
5658 if (IBI->getNumDestinations() == 0) {
5659 // If the indirectbr has no successors, change it to unreachable.
5660 new UnreachableInst(IBI->getContext(), IBI);
5661 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(IBI);
5662 return true;
5663 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005664
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005665 if (IBI->getNumDestinations() == 1) {
5666 // If the indirectbr has one successor, change it to a direct branch.
5667 BranchInst::Create(IBI->getDestination(0), IBI);
5668 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(IBI);
5669 return true;
5670 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005671
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005672 if (SelectInst *SI = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(IBI->getAddress())) {
5673 if (SimplifyIndirectBrOnSelect(IBI, SI))
Justin Bogner6f1740d2018-08-20 06:37:11 +00005674 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) || true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005675 }
5676 return Changed;
5677}
5678
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005679/// Given an block with only a single landing pad and a unconditional branch
5680/// try to find another basic block which this one can be merged with. This
5681/// handles cases where we have multiple invokes with unique landing pads, but
5682/// a shared handler.
5683///
5684/// We specifically choose to not worry about merging non-empty blocks
5685/// here. That is a PRE/scheduling problem and is best solved elsewhere. In
5686/// practice, the optimizer produces empty landing pad blocks quite frequently
5687/// when dealing with exception dense code. (see: instcombine, gvn, if-else
5688/// sinking in this file)
5689///
5690/// This is primarily a code size optimization. We need to avoid performing
5691/// any transform which might inhibit optimization (such as our ability to
5692/// specialize a particular handler via tail commoning). We do this by not
5693/// merging any blocks which require us to introduce a phi. Since the same
Jesper Antonsson514b6b52018-06-28 10:55:04 +00005694/// values are flowing through both blocks, we don't lose any ability to
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005695/// specialize. If anything, we make such specialization more likely.
5696///
5697/// TODO - This transformation could remove entries from a phi in the target
5698/// block when the inputs in the phi are the same for the two blocks being
5699/// merged. In some cases, this could result in removal of the PHI entirely.
5700static bool TryToMergeLandingPad(LandingPadInst *LPad, BranchInst *BI,
5701 BasicBlock *BB) {
5702 auto Succ = BB->getUniqueSuccessor();
5703 assert(Succ);
5704 // If there's a phi in the successor block, we'd likely have to introduce
5705 // a phi into the merged landing pad block.
5706 if (isa<PHINode>(*Succ->begin()))
5707 return false;
5708
5709 for (BasicBlock *OtherPred : predecessors(Succ)) {
5710 if (BB == OtherPred)
5711 continue;
5712 BasicBlock::iterator I = OtherPred->begin();
5713 LandingPadInst *LPad2 = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(I);
5714 if (!LPad2 || !LPad2->isIdenticalTo(LPad))
5715 continue;
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00005716 for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I)
5717 ;
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005718 BranchInst *BI2 = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(I);
5719 if (!BI2 || !BI2->isIdenticalTo(BI))
5720 continue;
5721
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00005722 // We've found an identical block. Update our predecessors to take that
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005723 // path instead and make ourselves dead.
Craig Topper61998282018-06-09 05:04:20 +00005724 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock *, 16> Preds;
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005725 Preds.insert(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
5726 for (BasicBlock *Pred : Preds) {
5727 InvokeInst *II = cast<InvokeInst>(Pred->getTerminator());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005728 assert(II->getNormalDest() != BB && II->getUnwindDest() == BB &&
5729 "unexpected successor");
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005730 II->setUnwindDest(OtherPred);
5731 }
5732
5733 // The debug info in OtherPred doesn't cover the merged control flow that
5734 // used to go through BB. We need to delete it or update it.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005735 for (auto I = OtherPred->begin(), E = OtherPred->end(); I != E;) {
5736 Instruction &Inst = *I;
5737 I++;
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005738 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(Inst))
5739 Inst.eraseFromParent();
5740 }
5741
Craig Topper61998282018-06-09 05:04:20 +00005742 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock *, 16> Succs;
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005743 Succs.insert(succ_begin(BB), succ_end(BB));
5744 for (BasicBlock *Succ : Succs) {
5745 Succ->removePredecessor(BB);
5746 }
5747
5748 IRBuilder<> Builder(BI);
5749 Builder.CreateUnreachable();
5750 BI->eraseFromParent();
5751 return true;
5752 }
5753 return false;
5754}
5755
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005756bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyUncondBranch(BranchInst *BI,
5757 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005758 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Balaram Makamb05a5572017-07-19 08:53:34 +00005759 BasicBlock *Succ = BI->getSuccessor(0);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005760
Reid Klecknerbca59d22016-05-02 19:43:22 +00005761 // If the Terminator is the only non-phi instruction, simplify the block.
Sanjay Patelca146972017-09-19 20:58:14 +00005762 // If LoopHeader is provided, check if the block or its successor is a loop
5763 // header. (This is for early invocations before loop simplify and
Balaram Makamb05a5572017-07-19 08:53:34 +00005764 // vectorization to keep canonical loop forms for nested loops. These blocks
5765 // can be eliminated when the pass is invoked later in the back-end.)
Serguei Katkov66182d62018-02-08 07:16:29 +00005766 // Note that if BB has only one predecessor then we do not introduce new
5767 // backedge, so we can eliminate BB.
Balaram Makamb05a5572017-07-19 08:53:34 +00005768 bool NeedCanonicalLoop =
Sanjay Patel0f9b4772017-09-27 14:54:16 +00005769 Options.NeedCanonicalLoop &&
Vedant Kumare0b5f862018-05-10 23:01:54 +00005770 (LoopHeaders && pred_size(BB) > 1 &&
Serguei Katkov66182d62018-02-08 07:16:29 +00005771 (LoopHeaders->count(BB) || LoopHeaders->count(Succ)));
Reid Klecknerbca59d22016-05-02 19:43:22 +00005772 BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->getIterator();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005773 if (I->isTerminator() && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock() &&
Balaram Makamb05a5572017-07-19 08:53:34 +00005774 !NeedCanonicalLoop && TryToSimplifyUncondBranchFromEmptyBlock(BB))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005775 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005776
Sanjay Patelca146972017-09-19 20:58:14 +00005777 // If the only instruction in the block is a seteq/setne comparison against a
5778 // constant, try to simplify the block.
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005779 if (ICmpInst *ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I))
5780 if (ICI->isEquality() && isa<ConstantInt>(ICI->getOperand(1))) {
5781 for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I)
5782 ;
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +00005783 if (I->isTerminator() &&
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005784 tryToSimplifyUncondBranchWithICmpInIt(ICI, Builder, DL, TTI, Options))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005785 return true;
5786 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005787
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005788 // See if we can merge an empty landing pad block with another which is
5789 // equivalent.
5790 if (LandingPadInst *LPad = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(I)) {
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00005791 for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I)
5792 ;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005793 if (I->isTerminator() && TryToMergeLandingPad(LPad, BI, BB))
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005794 return true;
5795 }
5796
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00005797 // If this basic block is ONLY a compare and a branch, and if a predecessor
5798 // branches to us and our successor, fold the comparison into the
5799 // predecessor and use logical operations to update the incoming value
5800 // for PHI nodes in common successor.
Sanjay Patel0f9b4772017-09-27 14:54:16 +00005801 if (FoldBranchToCommonDest(BI, Options.BonusInstThreshold))
Justin Bogner6f1740d2018-08-20 06:37:11 +00005802 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) || true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005803 return false;
5804}
5805
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00005806static BasicBlock *allPredecessorsComeFromSameSource(BasicBlock *BB) {
5807 BasicBlock *PredPred = nullptr;
5808 for (auto *P : predecessors(BB)) {
5809 BasicBlock *PPred = P->getSinglePredecessor();
5810 if (!PPred || (PredPred && PredPred != PPred))
5811 return nullptr;
5812 PredPred = PPred;
5813 }
5814 return PredPred;
5815}
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005816
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005817bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyCondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005818 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Matt Morehouse236cdaf2018-03-22 17:07:51 +00005819 const Function *Fn = BB->getParent();
5820 if (Fn && Fn->hasFnAttribute(Attribute::OptForFuzzing))
5821 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005822
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005823 // Conditional branch
5824 if (isValueEqualityComparison(BI)) {
5825 // If we only have one predecessor, and if it is a branch on this value,
5826 // see if that predecessor totally determines the outcome of this
5827 // switch.
5828 if (BasicBlock *OnlyPred = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005829 if (SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(BI, OnlyPred, Builder))
Justin Bogner6f1740d2018-08-20 06:37:11 +00005830 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) || true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005831
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005832 // This block must be empty, except for the setcond inst, if it exists.
5833 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
Florian Hahn3df88442018-04-30 20:10:53 +00005834 auto I = BB->instructionsWithoutDebug().begin();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005835 if (&*I == BI) {
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00005836 if (FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(BI, Builder))
Justin Bogner6f1740d2018-08-20 06:37:11 +00005837 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) || true;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005838 } else if (&*I == cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition())) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005839 ++I;
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00005840 if (&*I == BI && FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(BI, Builder))
Justin Bogner6f1740d2018-08-20 06:37:11 +00005841 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) || true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005842 }
5843 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005844
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005845 // Try to turn "br (X == 0 | X == 1), T, F" into a switch instruction.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005846 if (SimplifyBranchOnICmpChain(BI, Builder, DL))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005847 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005848
Chad Rosier4ab37c02016-05-06 14:25:14 +00005849 // If this basic block has a single dominating predecessor block and the
5850 // dominating block's condition implies BI's condition, we know the direction
5851 // of the BI branch.
5852 if (BasicBlock *Dom = BB->getSinglePredecessor()) {
5853 auto *PBI = dyn_cast_or_null<BranchInst>(Dom->getTerminator());
5854 if (PBI && PBI->isConditional() &&
Craig Topperdfd01ea2017-07-06 16:29:43 +00005855 PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1)) {
5856 assert(PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB || PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BB);
Chad Rosierdfd1de62017-08-01 20:18:54 +00005857 bool CondIsTrue = PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB;
Chad Rosier4ab37c02016-05-06 14:25:14 +00005858 Optional<bool> Implication = isImpliedCondition(
Chad Rosierdfd1de62017-08-01 20:18:54 +00005859 PBI->getCondition(), BI->getCondition(), DL, CondIsTrue);
Chad Rosier4ab37c02016-05-06 14:25:14 +00005860 if (Implication) {
5861 // Turn this into a branch on constant.
5862 auto *OldCond = BI->getCondition();
5863 ConstantInt *CI = *Implication
5864 ? ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext())
5865 : ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
5866 BI->setCondition(CI);
5867 RecursivelyDeleteTriviallyDeadInstructions(OldCond);
Justin Bogner6f1740d2018-08-20 06:37:11 +00005868 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) || true;
Chad Rosier4ab37c02016-05-06 14:25:14 +00005869 }
5870 }
5871 }
5872
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00005873 // If this basic block is ONLY a compare and a branch, and if a predecessor
5874 // branches to us and one of our successors, fold the comparison into the
5875 // predecessor and use logical operations to pick the right destination.
Sanjay Patel0f9b4772017-09-27 14:54:16 +00005876 if (FoldBranchToCommonDest(BI, Options.BonusInstThreshold))
Justin Bogner6f1740d2018-08-20 06:37:11 +00005877 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) || true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005878
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005879 // We have a conditional branch to two blocks that are only reachable
5880 // from BI. We know that the condbr dominates the two blocks, so see if
5881 // there is any identical code in the "then" and "else" blocks. If so, we
5882 // can hoist it up to the branching block.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00005883 if (BI->getSuccessor(0)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
5884 if (BI->getSuccessor(1)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005885 if (HoistThenElseCodeToIf(BI, TTI))
Justin Bogner6f1740d2018-08-20 06:37:11 +00005886 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) || true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005887 } else {
5888 // If Successor #1 has multiple preds, we may be able to conditionally
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00005889 // execute Successor #0 if it branches to Successor #1.
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005890 TerminatorInst *Succ0TI = BI->getSuccessor(0)->getTerminator();
5891 if (Succ0TI->getNumSuccessors() == 1 &&
5892 Succ0TI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(1))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005893 if (SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BI, BI->getSuccessor(0), TTI))
Justin Bogner6f1740d2018-08-20 06:37:11 +00005894 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) || true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005895 }
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00005896 } else if (BI->getSuccessor(1)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005897 // If Successor #0 has multiple preds, we may be able to conditionally
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00005898 // execute Successor #1 if it branches to Successor #0.
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005899 TerminatorInst *Succ1TI = BI->getSuccessor(1)->getTerminator();
5900 if (Succ1TI->getNumSuccessors() == 1 &&
5901 Succ1TI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(0))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005902 if (SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BI, BI->getSuccessor(1), TTI))
Justin Bogner6f1740d2018-08-20 06:37:11 +00005903 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) || true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005904 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005905
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005906 // If this is a branch on a phi node in the current block, thread control
5907 // through this block if any PHI node entries are constants.
5908 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BI->getCondition()))
5909 if (PN->getParent() == BI->getParent())
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005910 if (FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BI, DL, Options.AC))
Justin Bogner6f1740d2018-08-20 06:37:11 +00005911 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) || true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005912
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005913 // Scan predecessor blocks for conditional branches.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00005914 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI)
5915 if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>((*PI)->getTerminator()))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005916 if (PBI != BI && PBI->isConditional())
Philip Reamesb42db212015-10-14 22:46:19 +00005917 if (SimplifyCondBranchToCondBranch(PBI, BI, DL))
Justin Bogner6f1740d2018-08-20 06:37:11 +00005918 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) || true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005919
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00005920 // Look for diamond patterns.
5921 if (MergeCondStores)
5922 if (BasicBlock *PrevBB = allPredecessorsComeFromSameSource(BB))
5923 if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PrevBB->getTerminator()))
5924 if (PBI != BI && PBI->isConditional())
Alexey Bataev978e2e42017-08-29 20:06:24 +00005925 if (mergeConditionalStores(PBI, BI, DL))
Justin Bogner6f1740d2018-08-20 06:37:11 +00005926 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) || true;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005927
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005928 return false;
5929}
5930
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005931/// Check if passing a value to an instruction will cause undefined behavior.
5932static bool passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(Value *V, Instruction *I) {
5933 Constant *C = dyn_cast<Constant>(V);
5934 if (!C)
5935 return false;
5936
Benjamin Kramerd12e82e2012-10-04 16:11:49 +00005937 if (I->use_empty())
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005938 return false;
5939
David Majnemer1fea77c2016-06-25 07:37:27 +00005940 if (C->isNullValue() || isa<UndefValue>(C)) {
Benjamin Kramerd12e82e2012-10-04 16:11:49 +00005941 // Only look at the first use, avoid hurting compile time with long uselists
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00005942 User *Use = *I->user_begin();
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005943
5944 // Now make sure that there are no instructions in between that can alter
5945 // control flow (eg. calls)
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith0a12729f2016-08-16 23:57:56 +00005946 for (BasicBlock::iterator
5947 i = ++BasicBlock::iterator(I),
5948 UI = BasicBlock::iterator(dyn_cast<Instruction>(Use));
5949 i != UI; ++i)
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00005950 if (i == I->getParent()->end() || i->mayHaveSideEffects())
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005951 return false;
5952
5953 // Look through GEPs. A load from a GEP derived from NULL is still undefined
5954 if (GetElementPtrInst *GEP = dyn_cast<GetElementPtrInst>(Use))
5955 if (GEP->getPointerOperand() == I)
5956 return passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(V, GEP);
5957
5958 // Look through bitcasts.
5959 if (BitCastInst *BC = dyn_cast<BitCastInst>(Use))
5960 return passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(V, BC);
5961
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00005962 // Load from null is undefined.
5963 if (LoadInst *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(Use))
Andrew Tricka0a5ca02013-03-07 01:03:35 +00005964 if (!LI->isVolatile())
Manoj Gupta77eeac32018-07-09 22:27:23 +00005965 return !NullPointerIsDefined(LI->getFunction(),
5966 LI->getPointerAddressSpace());
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005967
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00005968 // Store to null is undefined.
5969 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(Use))
Andrew Tricka0a5ca02013-03-07 01:03:35 +00005970 if (!SI->isVolatile())
Manoj Gupta77eeac32018-07-09 22:27:23 +00005971 return (!NullPointerIsDefined(SI->getFunction(),
5972 SI->getPointerAddressSpace())) &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005973 SI->getPointerOperand() == I;
David Majnemer1fea77c2016-06-25 07:37:27 +00005974
5975 // A call to null is undefined.
5976 if (auto CS = CallSite(Use))
Manoj Gupta77eeac32018-07-09 22:27:23 +00005977 return !NullPointerIsDefined(CS->getFunction()) &&
5978 CS.getCalledValue() == I;
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005979 }
5980 return false;
5981}
5982
5983/// If BB has an incoming value that will always trigger undefined behavior
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +00005984/// (eg. null pointer dereference), remove the branch leading here.
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005985static bool removeUndefIntroducingPredecessor(BasicBlock *BB) {
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00005986 for (PHINode &PHI : BB->phis())
5987 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PHI.getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i)
5988 if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(PHI.getIncomingValue(i), &PHI)) {
5989 TerminatorInst *T = PHI.getIncomingBlock(i)->getTerminator();
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005990 IRBuilder<> Builder(T);
5991 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(T)) {
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00005992 BB->removePredecessor(PHI.getIncomingBlock(i));
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005993 // Turn uncoditional branches into unreachables and remove the dead
5994 // destination from conditional branches.
5995 if (BI->isUnconditional())
5996 Builder.CreateUnreachable();
5997 else
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005998 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB ? BI->getSuccessor(1)
5999 : BI->getSuccessor(0));
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00006000 BI->eraseFromParent();
6001 return true;
6002 }
6003 // TODO: SwitchInst.
6004 }
6005
6006 return false;
6007}
6008
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00006009bool SimplifyCFGOpt::run(BasicBlock *BB) {
Chris Lattner3f5823f2003-08-24 18:36:16 +00006010 bool Changed = false;
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00006011
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00006012 assert(BB && BB->getParent() && "Block not embedded in function!");
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00006013 assert(BB->getTerminator() && "Degenerate basic block encountered!");
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00006014
Dan Gohman4a63fad2010-08-14 00:29:42 +00006015 // Remove basic blocks that have no predecessors (except the entry block)...
6016 // or that just have themself as a predecessor. These are unreachable.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006017 if ((pred_empty(BB) && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock()) ||
Dan Gohman4a63fad2010-08-14 00:29:42 +00006018 BB->getSinglePredecessor() == BB) {
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00006019 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Removing BB: \n" << *BB);
David Majnemeree0cbbb2016-02-24 17:30:48 +00006020 DeleteDeadBlock(BB);
6021 return true;
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00006022 }
6023
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00006024 // Check to see if we can constant propagate this terminator instruction
6025 // away...
Frits van Bommelad964552011-05-22 16:24:18 +00006026 Changed |= ConstantFoldTerminator(BB, true);
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00006027
Dan Gohman1a951062009-10-30 22:39:04 +00006028 // Check for and eliminate duplicate PHI nodes in this block.
6029 Changed |= EliminateDuplicatePHINodes(BB);
6030
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00006031 // Check for and remove branches that will always cause undefined behavior.
6032 Changed |= removeUndefIntroducingPredecessor(BB);
6033
Chris Lattner2e3832d2010-12-13 05:10:48 +00006034 // Merge basic blocks into their predecessor if there is only one distinct
6035 // pred, and if there is only one distinct successor of the predecessor, and
6036 // if there are no PHI nodes.
Chris Lattner2e3832d2010-12-13 05:10:48 +00006037 if (MergeBlockIntoPredecessor(BB))
6038 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00006039
Michael Zolotukhinad371e02017-12-21 01:22:13 +00006040 if (SinkCommon && Options.SinkCommonInsts)
6041 Changed |= SinkCommonCodeFromPredecessors(BB);
6042
Devang Patel15ad6762011-05-18 18:01:27 +00006043 IRBuilder<> Builder(BB);
6044
Dan Gohman20af5a02008-03-11 21:53:06 +00006045 // If there is a trivial two-entry PHI node in this basic block, and we can
6046 // eliminate it, do so now.
Davide Italianoacf60652017-11-10 20:46:21 +00006047 if (auto *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin()))
Dan Gohman20af5a02008-03-11 21:53:06 +00006048 if (PN->getNumIncomingValues() == 2)
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00006049 Changed |= FoldTwoEntryPHINode(PN, TTI, DL);
Dan Gohman20af5a02008-03-11 21:53:06 +00006050
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00006051 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BB->getTerminator());
Davide Italianoacf60652017-11-10 20:46:21 +00006052 if (auto *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00006053 if (BI->isUnconditional()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006054 if (SimplifyUncondBranch(BI, Builder))
6055 return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00006056 } else {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006057 if (SimplifyCondBranch(BI, Builder))
6058 return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00006059 }
Davide Italianoacf60652017-11-10 20:46:21 +00006060 } else if (auto *RI = dyn_cast<ReturnInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006061 if (SimplifyReturn(RI, Builder))
6062 return true;
Davide Italianoacf60652017-11-10 20:46:21 +00006063 } else if (auto *RI = dyn_cast<ResumeInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006064 if (SimplifyResume(RI, Builder))
6065 return true;
Davide Italianoacf60652017-11-10 20:46:21 +00006066 } else if (auto *RI = dyn_cast<CleanupReturnInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006067 if (SimplifyCleanupReturn(RI))
6068 return true;
Davide Italianoacf60652017-11-10 20:46:21 +00006069 } else if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006070 if (SimplifySwitch(SI, Builder))
6071 return true;
Davide Italianoacf60652017-11-10 20:46:21 +00006072 } else if (auto *UI = dyn_cast<UnreachableInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006073 if (SimplifyUnreachable(UI))
6074 return true;
Davide Italianoacf60652017-11-10 20:46:21 +00006075 } else if (auto *IBI = dyn_cast<IndirectBrInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006076 if (SimplifyIndirectBr(IBI))
6077 return true;
Chris Lattnere42732e2004-02-16 06:35:48 +00006078 }
6079
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00006080 return Changed;
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00006081}
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00006082
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00006083bool llvm::simplifyCFG(BasicBlock *BB, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
6084 const SimplifyCFGOptions &Options,
Sanjay Patel0f9b4772017-09-27 14:54:16 +00006085 SmallPtrSetImpl<BasicBlock *> *LoopHeaders) {
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00006086 return SimplifyCFGOpt(TTI, BB->getModule()->getDataLayout(), LoopHeaders,
Sanjay Patel0f9b4772017-09-27 14:54:16 +00006087 Options)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006088 .run(BB);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00006089}